diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base')
127 files changed, 3373 insertions, 2399 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/README.md index 9c80b45c8a5..a4ce49ed27e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/README.md +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/README.md @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ The LaTeX kernel ================ -Release 2019-10-01 patch level 3 +Release 2020-02-02 Overview -------- @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ the most significant of these files are - `manifest.txt` lists all the files in this LaTeX distribution, with one line of information about the contents - `unpacked.txt` lists all the files in the unpacked LaTeX distribution -- `legal.txt` and `lppl.txt` (LaTeX Project Public License) describe the +- `legal.txt` and `lppl.txt` (LaTeX Project Public License) describe the LaTeX copyright, warranty and copying restrictions. - `patches.txt` describes the how important changes will be distributed between releases @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ The following files contain further information: - `tlc2.err` lists errata in _The LaTeX Companion_ (Mittelbach et al.) The files `ltnews*.tex` (part of the `doc` bundle) contain the LaTeX -newsletters, the highest number being the most recent. +newsletters, the highest number being the most recent. For historical reasons, the base distribution and the core documentation are bundled separately. Documentation is found in the `doc` bundle. In an @@ -97,7 +97,6 @@ version 1.3c or later. ----- -<p>Copyright (C) 1989-2019 The LaTeX Project <br /> +<p>Copyright (C) 1989-2020 The LaTeX Project <br /> <a href="http://latex-project.org/">http://latex-project.org/</a> <br /> All rights reserved.</p> - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/alltt.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/alltt.pdf Binary files differindex f2142c84eaf..8668d357446 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/alltt.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/alltt.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt index 86bdb734c8a..18914763251 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ LaTeX Error Reports - + January 2017 ERROR REPORTS @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Before you report an error, please check that: Project (see the discussion on the website why this is important). * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or - of other software. + of other software. * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has been modified elsewhere. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ core LaTeX software, please report it in the following way: https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/bugs-upload.html - Please fill in all required fields; in particular, make sure + Please fill in all required fields; in particular, make sure that your name, email address, and the summary description are correct (the email address will not be shared or made public). @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ If you find an error in one of the following books: Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Rahtz grphcomp.err Der LaTeX Begleiter, 2ed Mittelbach, Goossens, et al lb2.err The LaTeX Web Companion Goossens, Rahtz webcomp.err - + then please check first whether it is already mentioned in the errata file for that book (these files are part of the LaTeX distribution). @@ -83,7 +83,5 @@ given in that corresponding errata file. Please *do not* send such reports to the latex-bugs address. - ---- Copyright 1997,1998,2006,2008,2017 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- - +--- Copyright 1997,1998,2006,2008,2017 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf Binary files differindex f562c164955..9db957f80af 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex index 651b59bc20d..84cde10c84f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: cfgguide.tex @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ consequences. The file |ltnews.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the behaviour of the \textsf{ltnews} class; this class is used to typeset -the the one page newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution. +the newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution. If this file is present then it is read in at the beginning of the file |ltnews.cls|. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.old.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.old.txt index b764e8da16c..53073820dfa 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.old.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.old.txt @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ It is based on the 9906 test release of changes.txt Cheers, Ulrik. -P.S. From the historical point-of-view, it is interesting -to note that files like ltherest.dtx are first mentioned +P.S. From the historical point-of-view, it is interesting +to note that files like ltherest.dtx are first mentioned in mid-1991. That's way _before_ the last official releases of 2.09 (in December 1991 and March 1992). @@ -337,12 +337,12 @@ of 2.09 (in December 1991 and March 1992). + 1994-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> - * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): @@ -8291,4 +8299,931 @@ \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special requirements for packages that make certain characters active. -+ ++ +1994-02-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: 0.2z \@fileswithoptions Renamed \@compatibility to @@ -1268,4 +1268,4 @@ of 2.09 (in December 1991 and March 1992). + + * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@verbatim Added + \penalty\interlinepenalty to definition of \par so that -+ \samepage works
\ No newline at end of file ++ \samepage works diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt index 54d25d641d0..6b82d58616f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt @@ -5,6 +5,175 @@ are not part of the distribution. ======================================================================= ######################### +# 2020-02-02 Release +######################### + +2020-01-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx (subsection{Providing shipment}): + Allow spaces in option string and display + only unknown options not the whole option list (gh/256) + +2020-01-27 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Fix text of error message in filecontents + +2020-01-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + Load encoding files only once (except when doing rollback) + (part of gh/255) + +2020-01-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}): + Load t1enc.def last (part of gh/255) + +2020-01-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lttextcomp.dtx: The overall default is \textcompsubstdefault + not \substdefault + +2020-01-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx (section{Interface Commands}): + \DeclareMathDelimiter needs to use \protected for robustness (gh/251) + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Math material}): + \{ and \} need to use \protected for robustness (gh/251) + +2020-01-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx (section{Custom series settings for main document families}): + Cleaning up the code for \rmfamily, \sffamily, \ttfamily and adding + hooks to support Japanese implementations. + +2020-01-05 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * base/ltclass.dtx: Support more write streams for + filecontents in LuaTeX (gh/238) + + +2020-01-05 Marcel Fabian Krüger <Marcel@latex-project.org> + * base/ltluatex.dtx: New reverselist callback type. + + +2019-12-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lttextcomp.dtx: Implement text companion symbols in the kernel + (formerly textcomp package). + +2019-12-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: + Make remaing alias definition robust independently (gh/184) + +2019-12-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): + Normalize the itemlabels by providing \itemlabelfont + (defaulting to \normalfont) + +2019-12-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: improve \add@accent + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Default encodings}): + Don't fake \textcompwordmark; take default from T1 instead + +2019-12-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Defaults}): Set + \shapedefault explicitly to "n" not \updefault + \bfdefault set to to "b" not "bx" (but bx for CM fonts) + \updefault set to to "up" not "n". + Part of extending the series and shape handling, see ltnews31. + +2019-12-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx (section{Supporting nested emphasis}): + Support nested \emph sequences a generalization \eminnershape. + See ltnews31 for details. + + * ltfssini.dtx (section{Custom series settings for main document families}): + Provide custom series settings a la mweights package. + See ltnews31 for details. + +2019-12-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssaxes.dtx: Code for additional series and shape axes added + See ltnews31 for details. + +2019-12-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + Use \shapedefault not \updefault for extended NFSS + +2019-12-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Provide substitutions for cmtt/bx/sl + +2019-12-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Silent warning for cmss/it substitution (gh/172)} + +2019-11-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Be careful when displaying the package or + class info text as it may contain UTF-8 chars (gh/52)} + +2019-11-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + Avoid spurious warning if fontenc selects LY1 as default + encoding (gh/199) + +2019-11-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{The mapping table}): + Fixed setting for FB05 = long-s t lig (github/154) + In 8-bit encodings all we can do is to unravel to "s t" which is + not 100% but better than just a strange error. + +2019-11-14 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Add loader for ltexpl + * ltexpl.dtx: New file for pre-loading expl3 + +2019-11-11 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: use \quote@name again for \@filef@und in + \@iffileonpath + +2019-11-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Make \\ and \@centercr robust in all situations (gh/203) + * ltspace.dtx: Make \\ and \@normalcr robust in all situations (gh/203) + +2019-10-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx (section{Implementation}): Initialize + \...-h@@k only when loading the package or class (gh/198) + +2019-10-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsstrc.dtx (subsection{Sizefunctions}): + Added 'alias' size function (mainly for autoinst fonts) + +######################### +# 2019-10-01 PL 3 Release +######################### + +2019-11-10 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: fix special comment catcodes (gh/202) + +2019-11-09 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: More filename normalisation: expand before + removing quotes. + +######################### # 2019-10-01 PL 3 Release ######################### @@ -467,7 +636,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. 2017-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> - * ltvers.dtx: possible PL1 + * ltvers.dtx: possible PL1 * ltluatex.dtx: glyph_stream_provider is back in luatex 1.04 @@ -866,11 +1035,11 @@ are not part of the distribution. * ltvers.dtx: PL1 - * ltdirchk.dtx: Allow for full reversal of LuaTeX support + * ltdirchk.dtx: Allow for full reversal of LuaTeX support * ltluatex.dtx ######################### -# 2015/10/01 Release +# 2015/10/01 Release ######################### @@ -890,7 +1059,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. 2015-08-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> * ltplain.dtx: Add extended \newinsert, taking inserts from float - list. + list. 2015-08-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> @@ -926,7 +1095,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. ######################### -# 2015/01/01 PL 2 Release +# 2015/01/01 PL 2 Release ######################### 2015-07-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> @@ -936,7 +1105,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. * ltoutput.dtx: fix docstrip guard for latexrelease latex/4434 ######################### -# 2015/01/01 PL 1 Release +# 2015/01/01 PL 1 Release ######################### 2015-06-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> @@ -1130,7 +1299,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. * ltdefns.dtx: \MakeRobust from fixltx2e * ltboxes.dtx: make \makebox \parbox etc robust - + * ltmath.dtx: make \( \) and \[ \] robust * ltlength.dtx: add = to setlength (latexrelease) @@ -1164,7 +1333,7 @@ are not part of the distribution. * patchltx2e.ins: * unpack.ins: * manifest.txt New patchltx2e package added - + * ltfssbas.dtx: move allocation definition to ltplain * ltplain.dtx: Add new allocation code for extended registers @@ -10579,4 +10748,3 @@ are not part of the distribution. \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special requirements for packages that make certain characters active. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/classes.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/classes.pdf Binary files differindex 8461ace006d..d82b026f65a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/classes.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/classes.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf Binary files differindex e91b01b60d2..6cf3f297f26 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex index 2b3c4b3b001..d778bf9ff4c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: clsguide.tex @@ -37,46 +37,46 @@ \author{Copyright \copyright~1995--2006 The \LaTeX3 Project\\ All rights reserved} -\date{15 February 2006} +\date{15 February 2006} \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \tableofcontents - + \section{Introduction} This document is an introduction to writing classes and packages for \LaTeX{}, with special attention given to upgrading existing \LaTeX~2.09 packages to \LaTeXe{}. The latter subject is also covered in an article by Johannes Braams published in TUGboat~15.3. - + \subsection{Writing classes and packages for \LaTeXe} - + \LaTeX{} is a document preparation system that enables the document writer to concentrate on the contents of their text, without bothering too much about the formatting of it. For example, chapters are indicated by |\chapter{<title>}| rather than by selecting 18pt bold. - + The file that contains the information about how to turn logical structure (like `|\chapter|') into formatting (like `18pt bold ragged right') is a \emph{document class}. In addition, some features (such as colour or included graphics) are independent of the document class and these are contained in \emph{packages}. - + One of the largest differences between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in the commands used to write packages and classes. In \LaTeX~2.09, there was very little support for writing |.sty| files, and so writers had to resort to using low-level commands. - + \LaTeXe{} provides high-level commands for structuring packages. It is also much easier to build classes and packages on top of each other, for example writing a local technical report class |cetechr| (for the Chemical Engineering department) based on |article|. - + \subsection{Overview} - + This document contains an overview of how to write classes and packages for \LaTeX{}. It does \emph{not} introduce all of the commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either @@ -84,33 +84,33 @@ commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either commands for structuring classes and packages. \begin{description} - + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:general}] contains some general advice about writing classes and packages. It describes the difference between classes and packages, the command naming conventions, the use of |doc| and |docstrip|, how \TeX's primitive file and box commands interact with \LaTeX{}. It also contains some hints about general \LaTeX{} style. - + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:structure}] describes the structure of classes and packages. This includes building classes and packages on top of other classes and packages, declaring options and declaring commands. It also contains example classes. - + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] lists the new class and package commands. - + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade}] gives detailed advice on how to upgrade existing \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages to \LaTeXe{}. - + \end{description} - + \subsection{Further information} - + For a general introduction to \LaTeX{}, including the new features of \LaTeXe{}, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook} by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}. - + A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp\ second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}. The \LaTeX{} system is based on \TeX{}, which is described in \emph{The \TeX book} by Donald E.~Knuth~\cite{A-W:DEK91}. - + There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy of \LaTeX{}. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files \emph{\fntguide} describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for class- and package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Configuring \LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in -\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on +\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in \texttt{modguide.tex}. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ cannot be changed. We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of packages that can be used to enhance these classes. So your first thought when you consider such a deficiency will, we hope, be ``what -can I do to improve this?'' +can I do to improve this?'' Similar considerations apply to those parts of the kernel that are implementing design decisions, many of which should be left to the @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ enhancements will have to wait for \LaTeX3. \section{Writing classes and packages} \label{Sec:writing} - + This section covers some general points concerned with writing \LaTeX{} classes and packages. @@ -206,33 +206,33 @@ supported by individuals: they should support only the new standard \subsection{Using `docstrip' and `doc'} - + If you are going to write a large class or package for \LaTeX{} then you should consider using the |doc| software which comes with -\LaTeX{}. +\LaTeX{}. \LaTeX{} classes and packages written using this can be processed in two ways: they can be run through \LaTeX{}, to produce documentation; and they can be processed with |docstrip|, to produce the |.cls| or |.sty| file. - + The |doc| software can automatically generate indexes of definitions, indexes of command use, and change-log lists. It is very useful for maintaining and documenting large \TeX{} sources. - + The documented sources of the \LaTeX{} kernel itself, and of the standard classes, etc, are |doc| documents; they are in the |.dtx| files in the distribution. You can, in fact, typeset the source code of the kernel as one long document, complete with index, by running \LaTeX{} on |source2e.tex|. Typesetting these documents uses the class file |ltxdoc.cls|. - + For more information on |doc| and |docstrip|, consult the files |docstrip.dtx|, |doc.dtx|, and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. For examples of its use, look at the |.dtx| files. \subsection{Is it a class or a package?} \label{Sec:classorpkg} - + The first thing to do when you want to put some new \LaTeX{} commands in a file is to decide whether it should be a \emph{document class} or a \emph{package}. The rule of thumb is: @@ -250,59 +250,59 @@ Thus, a company might have a local |ownlet| class for printing letters with their own headed note-paper. Such a class would build on top of the existing |letter| class but it cannot be used with any other document class, so we have |ownlet.cls| rather than |ownlet.sty|. - + The |graphics| package, in contrast, provides commands for including images into a \LaTeX{} document. Since these commands can be used with any document class, we have |graphics.sty| rather than |graphics.cls|. - + \subsection{Command names} - + \LaTeX{} has three types of command. - + There are the author commands, such as |\section|, |\emph| and |\times|: most of these have short names, all in lower case. - + There are also the class and package writer commands: most of these have long mixed-case names such as the following. \begin{verbatim} \InputIfFileExists \RequirePackage \PassOptionsToClass \end{verbatim} - + Finally, there are the internal commands used in the \LaTeX{} implementation, such as |\@tempcnta|, |\@ifnextchar| and |\@eha|: most of these commands contain |@| in their name, which means they cannot be used in documents, only in class and package files. - + Unfortunately, for historical reasons the distinction between these commands is often blurred. For example, |\hbox| is an internal command which should only be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, whereas |\m@ne| is the constant $-1$ and could have been |\MinusOne|. - + However, this rule of thumb is still useful: if a command has |@| in its name then it is not part of the supported \LaTeX{} language---and its behaviour may change in future releases! If a command is mixed-case, or is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, then you can rely on future releases of \LaTeXe{} supporting the command. - + \subsection{Box commands and colour} \label{Sec:colour} - + Even if you do not intend to use colour in your own documents, by taking note of the points in this section you can ensure that your class or package is compatible with the |color| package. This may benefit people using your class or package who have access to colour printers. - + The simplest way to ensure `colour safety' is to always use \LaTeX{} box commands rather than \TeX{} primitives, that is use |\sbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox| and |\parbox| or the |minipage| environment rather than |\vbox|. The \LaTeX{} box commands have new options which mean that they are now as powerful as the \TeX{} primitives. - -As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in + +As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in |{\ttfamily <text>}| the font is restored just \emph{before} the |}|, whereas in the similar looking construction @@ -318,11 +318,11 @@ stored in the box. Exactly what bad effects this can have depends on how colour is implemented: it can range from getting the wrong colours in the rest of the document, to causing errors in the dvi-driver used to print the document. - -Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|. This is + +Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|. This is normally just |\relax| (i.e., does nothing) -but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to -set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the +but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to +set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the `main document colour'. @@ -349,13 +349,13 @@ outside math mode: for example, neither |\textfont 1| nor The new system provides many commands designed to help you produce well-structured class and package files that are both robust and portable. This section outlines some ways to make intelligent use of -these. +these. \subsubsection{Loading other files} \label{Sec:loading} \NEWdescription{1995/12/01} -\LaTeX{} provides these commands: +\LaTeX{} provides these commands: \begin{verbatim} \LoadClass \LoadClassWithOptions \RequirePackage \RequirePackageWithOptions @@ -363,20 +363,20 @@ these. for using classes or packages inside other classes or packages. We recommend strongly that you use them, rather than the primitive |\input| command, for a number of reasons. - + Files loaded with |\input <filename>| will not be listed in the |\listfiles| list. - + If a package is always loaded with |\RequirePackage...| or |\usepackage| then, even if its loading is requested several times, it will be loaded only once. By contrast, if it is loaded with |\input| then it can be loaded more than once; such an extra loading may waste time and memory and it may produce strange results. - + If a package provides option-processing then, again, strange results are possible if the package is |\input| rather than loaded by means of |\usepackage| or |\RequirePackage...|. - + If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of |\input baz.sty| then the user will get a warning: \begin{verbatim} @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of \end{verbatim} Thus, for several reasons, using |\input| to load packages is not a good idea. - + Unfortunately, if you are upgrading the file |myclass.sty| to a class file then you have to make sure that any old files which contain |\input myclass.sty| still work. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ For example, |article.sty| contains just the following lines: \end{verbatim} You may wish to do the same or, if you think that it is safe to do so, you may decide to just remove |myclass.sty|. - + \subsubsection{Make it robust} We consider it good practice, when writing packages and classes, to use @@ -415,20 +415,20 @@ Thus, instead of using |\def...| we recommend using one of also useful. Doing this makes it less likely that you will inadvertently redefine a command, giving unexpected results. - + When you define an environment, use |\newenvironment| or |\renewenvironment| instead |\def\foo{...}| and |\def\endfoo{...}|. - + If you need to set or change the value of a \m{dimen} or \m{skip} register, use |\setlength|. - + To manipulate boxes, use \LaTeX{} commands such as |\sbox|, |\mbox| and |\parbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\hbox| and |\vbox|. - + Use |\PackageError|, |\PackageWarning| or |\PackageInfo| (or the equivalent class commands) rather than |\@latexerr|, |\@warning| or |\wlog|. - + It is still possible to declare options by defining |\ds@<option>| and calling |\@options|; but we recommend the |\DeclareOption| and |\ProcessOptions| commands instead. These are more powerful and use @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ It is also useful if local classes or packages have a common prefix, for example the University of Nowhere classes might begin with |unw|. This helps to avoid every University having its own thesis class, all called |thesis.cls|. - + If you rely on some features of the \LaTeX{} kernel, or on a package, please specify the release-date you need. For example, the package error commands were introduced in the June 1994 release so, if you use @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ particular, no typesetting can be done. \section{The structure of a class or package} \label{Sec:structure} - + \LaTeXe{} classes and packages have more structure than \LaTeX~2.09 style files did. The outline of a class or package file is: \begin{description} @@ -500,9 +500,9 @@ style files did. The outline of a class or package file is: \item[More declarations] This is where the file does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts; and loading other files. \end{description} - + \subsection{Identification} - + The first thing a class or package file does is identify itself. Package files do this as follows: \begin{verbatim} @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ For example: \NEWdescription{1998/06/19} The \m{date} should be given in the form `\textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}' and must be present if the optional argument is used (this is also true -for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command). +for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command). Any derivation from this syntax will result in low-level \TeX{} errors---the commands expect a valid syntax to speed up the daily usage of the package or class and make no provision for the case that @@ -538,10 +538,10 @@ This date is checked whenever a user specifies a date in their \begin{verbatim} \documentclass{article}[1995/12/23] \end{verbatim} -then users at a different location +then users at a different location would get a warning that their copy of |article| was out of date. - + The description of a class is displayed when the class is used. The description of a package is put into the log file. These descriptions are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command. The phrase @@ -549,14 +549,14 @@ are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command. The phrase banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution. - + \subsection{Using classes and packages} - + The first major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 style files and \LaTeXe{} packages and classes is that \LaTeXe{} supports \emph{modularity}, in the sense of building files from small building-blocks rather than using large single files. - + A \LaTeX{} package or class can load a package as follows: \begin{verbatim} \RequirePackage[<options>]{<package>}[<date>] @@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ It allows packages or classes to use features provided by other packages. For example, by loading the |ifthen| package, a package writer can use the `if\dots then\dots else\dots' commands provided by that package. - + A \LaTeX{} class can load one other class as follows: \begin{verbatim} \LoadClass[<options>]{<class-name>}[<date>] @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ For example: \end{verbatim} \subsection{Declaring options} - + \NEWdescription{1998/12/01} The other major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 styles and \LaTeXe{} packages and classes is in option handling. Packages and classes can @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ class, you can use: \end{verbatim} If you do this then you should make sure you load the class at some later point, otherwise the options will never be processed! - + So far, we have explained only how to declare options, not how to execute them. To process the options with which the file was called, you should use: @@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ you should use: This executes the \m{code} for each option that was both specified and declared (see Section~\ref{Sec:commands.options} for details of how this is done). - + For example, if the |jane| package file contains: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareOption{foo}{\typeout{Saw foo.}} @@ -686,16 +686,16 @@ For example, if the |jane| package file contains: \end{verbatim} and an author writes |\usepackage[foo,bar]{jane}|, then they will see the messages \texttt{Saw foo.} and \texttt{What's bar?} - + \subsection{A minimal class file} - + Most of the work of a class or package is in defining new commands, or changing the appearance of documents. This is done in the body of the package, using commands such as |\newcommand| or |\setlength|. \LaTeXe{} provides several new commands to help class and package writers; these are described in detail in Section~\ref{Sec:commands}. - + There are four things that every class file \emph{must} contain: these are a definition of |\normalsize|, values for |\textwidth| and |\textheight| and a specification for page-numbering. So a minimal @@ -713,13 +713,13 @@ distribution, as \texttt{minimal.cls}.} looks like this: However, this class file will not support footnotes, marginals, floats, etc., nor will it provide any of the 2-letter font commands such as |\rm|; thus most classes will contain more than this minimum! - + \subsection{Example: a local letter class} - + A company may have its own letter class, for setting letters in the company style. This section shows a simple implementation of such a class, although a real class would need more structure. - + The class begins by announcing itself as |neplet.cls|. \begin{verbatim} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} @@ -742,9 +742,9 @@ the first page of letters. } \end{verbatim} And that's it! - + \subsection{Example: a newsletter class} - + A simple newsletter can be typeset with \LaTeX{}, using a variant of the |article| class. The class begins by announcing itself as |smplnews.cls|. @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ It redefines |\section| and switches off section numbering. {section}{1}{0pt}{-1.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% {1ex plus .2ex}{\large\sffamily\slshape\headlinecolor}% } - + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} \end{verbatim} It also sets the three essential things. @@ -806,20 +806,20 @@ In practice, a class would need more than this: it would provide commands for issue numbers, authors of articles, page styles and so on; but this skeleton gives a start. The |ltnews| class file is not much more complex than this one. - + \section{Commands for class and package writers} \label{Sec:commands} - + This section describes briefly each of the new commands for class and package writers. To find out about other aspects of the new system, you should also read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and \emph{\usrguide}. - + \subsection{Identification} - + The first group of commands discussed here are those used to identify your class or package file. - + \begin{decl} |\NeedsTeXFormat| \arg{format-name} \oarg{release-date} \end{decl} @@ -830,12 +830,12 @@ format that is needed. When the release date of the format is older than the one specified a warning will be generated. The standard \m{format-name} is \texttt{LaTeX2e}. The date, if present, must be in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} |\ProvidesClass| \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info} \\ |\ProvidesPackage| \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-info} @@ -857,25 +857,25 @@ release is not too old. The whole of this \m{release-info} information is displayed by |\listfiles| and should therefore not be too long. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX class] \ProvidesPackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX package] \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} |\ProvidesFile| \arg{file-name} \oarg{release-info} \end{decl} This is similar to the two previous commands except that here the full filename, including the extension, must be given. It is used for declaring any files other than main class and package files. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \ProvidesFile{T1enc.def}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX file] \end{verbatim} - + Note that the phrase \texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used in the identification banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution. @@ -896,13 +896,13 @@ Packages and classes should use these commands to load other packages. The use of |\RequirePackage| is the same as the author command |\usepackage|. - + Examples: \begin{verbatim} \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01] \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01] \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} |\LoadClass| \oarg{options-list} \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info}\\ @@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ Examples: These commands are for use \emph{only} in class files, they cannot be used in packages files; they can be used at most once within a class file. - + The use of |\LoadClass| is the same as the use of |\documentclass| to load a class file. @@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ There are some commands designed especially for use within the |\DeclareOption| \arg{option-name} \arg{code} \end{decl} This makes \m{option-name} a `declared option' of the class or package -in which it is put. +in which it is put. The \m{code} argument contains the code to be executed if that option is specified for the class or package; it can contain any valid @@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue} \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} |\DeclareOption*| \arg{code} \end{decl} @@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ used within these arguments can be found in the next few subsections. |\CurrentOption| \end{decl} This expands to the name of the current option. - + \begin{decl} |\OptionNotUsed| \end{decl} @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ be added to the list of `unused options'. necessary to double them). \subsection{Moving options around} -\label{Sec:opmove} +\label{Sec:opmove} These two commands are also very useful within the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|: @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ The command |\PassOptionsToPackage| passes the option names in This means that it adds the \m{option-list} to the list of options used by any future |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| command for package \m{package-name}. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred} @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ is the same as: Similarly, |\PassOptionsToClass| may be used in a class file to pass options to another class to be loaded with |\LoadClass|. - + \NEWdescription{1995/12/01} The effects and use of these two commands should be contrasted with those of the following two (documented above, in \ref{Sec:loadf}): @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ declared. \subsection{Delaying code} \label{Sec:delays} -These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within +These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. \begin{decl} @@ -1087,18 +1087,18 @@ the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. These commands declare \m{code} that is saved away internally and then executed after processing the whole of the current class or package file. - + Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their declarations. - + \begin{decl} |\AtBeginDocument| \arg{code}\\ |\AtEndDocument| \arg{code} \end{decl} These commands declare \m{code} to be saved internally and executed while \LaTeX{} is executing |\begin{document}| or |\end{document}|. - + The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| is executed near the end of the |\begin{document}| code, \emph{after} the font selection tables have been set up. It is therefore a useful @@ -1116,11 +1116,11 @@ executed at the beginning of the |\end{document}| code, floating environments are processed. If some of the \m{code} is to be executed after these two processes, you should include a |\clearpage| at the appropriate point in \m{code}. - + Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their declarations. - + \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] |\AtBeginDvi| \arg{specials} \end{decl} @@ -1130,21 +1130,21 @@ document. This should not be used for anything that will add any typeset material to the |.dvi| file. - + Repeated use of this command is permitted. - + \subsection{Option processing} \label{Sec:commands.options} - + \begin{decl} |\ProcessOptions| \end{decl} This command executes the \m{code} for each selected option. - + We shall first describe how |\ProcessOptions| works in a package file, and then how this differs in a class file. - + To understand in detail what |\ProcessOptions| does in a package file, you have to know the difference between \emph{local} and \emph{global} options. @@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ Note the following: were specified), whilst the |twocolumn| option does not: this is because |twocolumn| is a global option. \end{itemize} - + In a class file, |\ProcessOptions| works in the same way, except that: \emph{all} options are local; and the default value for |\DeclareOption*| is |\OptionNotUsed| rather than an error. @@ -1244,7 +1244,7 @@ error messages being issued. This is like |\ProcessOptions| but it executes the options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the -global options are processed first. +global options are processed first. The |\@options| command from \LaTeX~2.09 has been made equivalent to this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to @@ -1254,8 +1254,8 @@ this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to |\ExecuteOptions| \arg{options-list} \end{decl} -For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order, -this command simply executes the command +For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order, +this command simply executes the command |\ds@<option>| (if this command is not defined, then that option is silently ignored). @@ -1269,19 +1269,19 @@ in two columns. Then it could specify: \subsection{Safe file commands} - + These commands deal with file input; they ensure that the non-existence of a requested file can be handled in a user-friendly way. - + \begin{decl} |\IfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false} \end{decl} If the file exists then the code specified in \m{true} is executed. - + If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is executed. - + This command does \emph{not} input the file. \begin{decl} @@ -1292,15 +1292,15 @@ before the input, the code specified in \m{true} is executed. If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is executed. - + It is implemented using |\IfFileExists|. \subsection{Reporting errors, etc} - + These commands should be used by third party classes and packages to report errors, or to provide information to authors. - + \begin{decl} |\ClassError| \arg{class-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}\\ |\PackageError| \arg{package-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text} @@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ report errors, or to provide information to authors. These produce an error message. The \m{error-text} is displayed and the |?| error prompt is shown. If the user types |h|, they will be shown the \m{help-text}. - + Within the \m{error-text} and \m{help-text}: |\protect| can be used to stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; and |\space| prints a space. @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ If the user types |h|, this will be shown: Oh dear! Something's gone wrong. Try typing <<return>> to proceed, ignoring \foo. \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} |\ClassWarning| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ |\PackageWarning| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ @@ -1365,11 +1365,11 @@ stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; and |\space| prints a space. Also, these should not end with a full stop as one is automatically added. - + \subsection{Defining commands} \label{Sec:commands.define} - + \LaTeXe{} provides some extra methods of (re)defining commands that are intended for use in class and package files. @@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ a robust command, even if some code within the \m{definition} is fragile. You can use this command to define new robust commands, or to redefine existing commands and make them robust. A log is put into the transcript file if a command is redefined. - + For example, if |\seq| is defined as follows: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareRobustCommand{\seq}[2][n]{% @@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but, rather than define \m{cmd}, it just checks that the current definition of \m{cmd} is exactly as given by \m{definition}. An error is raised if these definitions differ. - + This command is useful for checking the state of the system before your package starts altering the definitions of commands. It allows you to check, in particular, that no other package has redefined the @@ -1442,7 +1442,7 @@ We hope that these changes will not affect many packages. \label{Sec:commands.misc} \subsection{Layout parameters} - + \begin{decl} |\paperheight|\\ |\paperwidth| @@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ For example: \begin{tabular}{rl} |\uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ |\lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ - |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & + |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ |\MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE} \end{tabular} @@ -1581,11 +1581,11 @@ default setting will be over-ridden. \section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages} \label{Sec:upgrade} - + This section describes the changes you may need to make when you upgrade an existing \LaTeX{} style to a package or class but we shall start in optimistic mode. - + Many existing style files will run with \LaTeXe{} without any modification to the file itself. When everything is running OK, please put a note in the newly created package or class file to record @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ reasons. \begin{itemize} \item \LaTeX{} now has a robust, well-defined designer's interface for selecting fonts, which is very different from the \LaTeX~2.09 - internals. + internals. \item Your style file may have used some \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands which have changed, or which have been removed. \end{itemize} @@ -1651,13 +1651,13 @@ condition, as follows: \subsection{Font commands} - + Some font and size commands are now defined by the document class rather than by the \LaTeX{} kernel. If you are upgrading a \LaTeX~2.09 document style to a class that does not load one of the standard classes, then you will probably need to add definitions for these commands. - + \begin{decl} |\rm| |\sf| |\tt| |\bf| |\it| |\sl| |\sc| \end{decl} @@ -1676,7 +1676,7 @@ One possible definition is: This would make the font commands orthogonal; for example |{\bf\it text}| would produce bold italic, thus: \textbf{\textit{text}}. It will also make them produce an error if used in math mode. - + Another possible definition is: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}{\mathrm} @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ follow the standard classes and define: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\mathsc} \end{verbatim} This means, for example, that |{\bf\it text}| will produce medium -weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}. +weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}. \begin{decl} |\normalsize| \\ @@ -1728,11 +1728,11 @@ This means you should use |\renewcommand| for |\normalsize| and \subsection{Obsolete commands} - + Some packages will not work with \LaTeXe{}, normally because they relied on an internal \LaTeX{} command which was never supported and has now changed, or been removed. - + In many cases there will now be a robust, high-level means of achieving what previously required low-level commands. Please consult Section~\ref{Sec:commands} to see if you can now use the \LaTeXe{} @@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ check any that you have used or changed. We shall, however, list some of the more important commands which are no longer supported. - + \begin{decl} |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\ |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\ @@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ For example, the command |\twlsf| should be replaced by: Another possibility is to use the |rawfonts| package, described in \emph{\usrguide}. -Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09 +Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09 are no longer preloaded. \begin{decl} @@ -1799,7 +1799,7 @@ These commands have now been reimplemented using If your package redefined one of the |\p|-commands then you must remove the redefinition and use |\DeclareRobustCommand| to redefine the non-|\p| command. - + \begin{decl} |\footheight|\\ |\@maxsep|\\ @@ -1808,20 +1808,20 @@ non-|\p| command. These parameters are not used by \LaTeXe{} so they have been removed, except in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. Classes should no longer set them. - + \begin{thebibliography}{1} - + \bibitem{A-W:DEK91} Donald~E. Knuth. \newblock {\em The \TeX book}. \newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. \newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. - + \bibitem{A-W:LLa94} Leslie Lamport. \newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. \newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. - + \bibitem{A-W:MG2004} Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. \newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. @@ -1856,7 +1856,7 @@ Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}. If your file sets up new fonts, font-changing commands or symbols, you should also read \emph{\fntguide}. - + \item It did not work? There are three possibilities here: \begin{itemize} \item error messages are produced whilst reading your file; @@ -1871,4 +1871,3 @@ Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}. \end{enumerate} \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf Binary files differindex cf91d5b9853..3e4ce63df00 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf Binary files differindex e9f7d3ce9dd..0cc3392bcea 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex index ed73423510d..44c30b1153f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ were written by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich (except that the concrete hyphenation patterns which are part of \textsf{ruhyphen} came from individual authors). The support for the Ukrainian language was prepared by Andrij Shvaika. - + \section{Installation} @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ releases of \babel{}, will be withdrawn in the near future and replaced by the |OT2| encoding. \subsection{Getting pre-built packages} - + Many of the major \TeX{} distributions, such as te\TeX{}, fp\TeX{} and \TeX{}live, contain (or soon will) everything that is needed, including the LH~fonts, \textsf{ruhyphen} and the latest version of @@ -301,15 +301,15 @@ variants of each other). \item |cp855| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Cyrillic code-page. -\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page. +\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page. Several code-pages very similar to this are also supported (the differences are all in the range 242--254). \begin{itemize} \item |cp866av| -- the `Cyrillic Alternative' code-page (an alternative variant of cp866); - \item |cp866mav| -- the `Modified Alternative Variant'; - \item |cp866nav| -- the `New Alternative Variant'; - \item |cp866tat| -- an experimental Tatarian code-page. + \item |cp866mav| -- the `Modified Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866nav| -- the `New Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866tat| -- an experimental Tatarian code-page. \end{itemize} \item |cp1251| --- the standard MS Windows Cyrillic code-page. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ variants of each other). code-pages which coincide for all Russian letters but add some other Cyrillic letters. The following are supported: \begin{itemize} - \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}} -- for Ukrainian; + \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}} -- for Ukrainian; \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-ru}} -- this is described in a draft RFC document specifying a widely used character set for mail and news exchange in the Ukrainian internet community, as well as for @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ variants of each other). \item |iso88595| --- the \mbox{ISO 8859-5} Cyrillic code-page (also called \mbox{ISO-IR-144}). - + \item |maccyr| --- the Apple Macintosh Cyrillic code-page (also known as Microsoft cp10007) and |macukr|, the Apple Macintosh Ukrainian code-page, very similar to the Cyrillic code-page. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/doc.pdf Binary files differindex bcac2317822..667ecd8e1d2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/doc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/doc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/docstrip.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/docstrip.pdf Binary files differindex 107db5398a0..764221283fe 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/docstrip.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/docstrip.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.pdf Binary files differindex 2d432840710..5508bfd2c69 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.tex index ec18fab6f8a..339bce1eb33 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/encguide.tex @@ -1,38 +1,38 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % - + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] - + \documentclass{ltxguide}[1994/11/20] - + \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} \usepackage{textcomp} @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ \else \count@="80 \setbox0=\hbox{\X - \loop\char\count@\advance\count@ by1 \ifnum\count@<"100 + \loop\char\count@\advance\count@ by1 \ifnum\count@<"100 \repeat}% \ifdim\wd0>0pt \let\top\tophalf\else\let\top\notophalf\fi \beginchart\X{\hfill\llap{\textbf{#1, \large#2}\label{fonttable:#1}}}\normalchart @@ -186,18 +186,18 @@ \setcounter{tocdepth}{3} \title{\LaTeX{} font encodings} - + \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Robin Fairbairns \and Werner Lemberg \and \LaTeX3 Project Team.} - + \date{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2016 \\[5pt] 18 February 2016} - + \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \tableofcontents - + \section{Introduction} This document explains the ideas that underpin \LaTeX{} font @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ The Computer Modern text encoding raises problems in unmodified \verb"\accent" commands. Even in those Western European languages for which the \Enc{OT1} encoding has symbols for the necessary \verb"\accent"-based diacritics, this shortcoming ruins typesetting of -running text. +running text. With the advent of \TeX{}\,3, with its ability to switch between hyphenation pattern sets, it was clear that the situation could not @@ -299,11 +299,11 @@ most likely be delayed still further. \subsection{Further information} - + For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of \LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. - + A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp{} second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and @@ -313,11 +313,11 @@ The \LaTeX{} project sponsored a report on Mathematical % spelt out in full font encodings, which is worth reading for its insight into the problems of defining the way in which math is used: see~\cite{ziegler,clasen,clasen-vieth}. - + The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3. - + For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX, please contact your local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group (\url{http://www.tug.org}). @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. change from font to font, a number of problems arise, so it is best to develop encodings that can be used with a large number of fonts in parallel. This allows documents to be typeset using different fonts without problems. - + The \Enc{TS1} encoding is a good example of a \emph{bad} encoding (even though it was developed with the best intentions) as a huge number of fonts can only implement parts of it. Similarly, the fact that the few sets of @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. problems. Don't add to this if possible! \end{quote} - + \subsection{128$^+$ glyph encodings (text)} The `OT' series of font encodings start with Donald Knuth's original @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. \verb=\=, \verb={=, and \verb=}= are only available in the typewriter fonts and the \textdollar{} and \textsterling{} signs share the same position (in different font shapes). - + This means that direct selection of these slots can produce unpredictable results, e.g., typing \texttt{\string<} or \verb=\symbol{'74}= in a document can yield `\textquestiondown'. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. The \Enc{OT3} encoding was never really used with \LaTeXe{} following the introduction of the TIPA system which offers much better support for IPA. In particular, no \File{ot3enc.def} - file was ever produced. + file was ever produced. \end{encodinginfo} @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. \end{encodinginfo} - + \begin{encodinginfo}{OT6} {Armenian text encoding} @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. {--- (within each encoding)} {larm1000} {\cite{Berdnikov:eurotex-98}} - + There are too many glyphs in the full Cyrillic complement of languages for all of them to be covered by a single \LaTeX{}-compliant encoding (the lower half of each @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. The \Enc{T3} encoding (and associated macros) provides the glyphs required in phonetic description according to current International Phonetic Association recommendations \cite{ipa}. - + The \Enc{T3} encoding does \emph{not fulfil} the requirements for \Enc{T} encodings---the name is a historical accident. The correct name would be \Enc{X3}, but due to the fact that this font family has been used under its @@ -569,15 +569,15 @@ signifying `original', or just `old'. {0x00--0xFF} % range(s) of slots used for glyphs {0x24} % range(s) of slots with variable glyphs if any {fcr10} % name of an example font - {\cite{tub:JKn93}} + {\cite{tub:JKn93}} The African Latin fonts contain in their lower half (0--127) the same characters as the European Latin (T1-encoded) Fonts, while in their upper half (128--255) they contain letters and symbols for African languages that use extended -Latin alphabets. +Latin alphabets. Due to lack of space, J\"org had to play the unfortunate trick of -assigning \verb=\textdollar= and \verb=\textsterling= +assigning \verb=\textdollar= and \verb=\textsterling= the same position; users should take these characters from the text companion font, if they are needed. Instead of defining a lot of new control sequences for the single letters, there are three @@ -585,9 +585,9 @@ accent-like control sequences with general purpose: \verb=\m= (Modified-1), \verb=\M= (Modified-2) and \verb=\B= (Barred). -Most standard \LaTeX{} encoding-dependent commands +Most standard \LaTeX{} encoding-dependent commands work. However, the Icelandic special letters are not available and `best -replacements' for \verb=\Th=, \verb=\th=, and \verb=\dh= +replacements' for \verb=\Th=, \verb=\th=, and \verb=\dh= are used (barred T and d resp.). \end{encodinginfo} @@ -673,8 +673,8 @@ itself hasn't been defined so far. \else \expandafter\ifx\csname r@fonttable:ptmr8c\endcsname\relax \else - \space (compare the two tables for \Enc{TS1} on - pages~\pageref{fonttable:tcrm1000} + \space (compare the two tables for \Enc{TS1} on + pages~\pageref{fonttable:tcrm1000} and~\pageref{fonttable:ptmr8c})% \fi \fi. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ itself hasn't been defined so far. {---} {cmsy10} {\cite[p.431]{A-W:DKn86}} - + The \Enc{OMS} encoding contains basic mathematical symbols, together with an uppercase ``calligraphic'' Latin alphabet. \end{encodinginfo} @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {all} {} {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} - + As the name indicates, encodings starting with the letter \Enc{E} are intended for experimental encodings, that are still likely to change. \end{encodinginfo} @@ -811,14 +811,14 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {all} {} {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} - + `Local' encodings provide the means to develop representation techniques that are suited to a particular \TeX{} environment. While the developer has freedom to specify their encoding as he or she pleases, there is a strong incentive to obey the \LaTeX{} rules for encodings, since it will otherwise be difficult to compose text using the encoding. - + At least it was the intention that \Enc{L..} encodings are local and site dependent. However, a number of such encodings became generally used without ever getting a different name allocated. @@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {\emph{believed none}} {ptmr8y} {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} - + This is an alternative to the \Enc{T1} encoding developed by Y\&Y and used in their commercial \TeX{} implementation. @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {\emph{believed none}} {grmn1000} {\cite[p.575]{A-W:MG2004}} - + Currently the main encoding in use for the Greek language. This encoding doesn't conform to the restrictions for @@ -881,7 +881,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {---} {} {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}} - + The \Enc{PD1} encoding is a virtual encoding with 256 glyphs needed to produce bookmarks and similar text in PDF document generated with pdf\LaTeX. The encoding is ``virtual'' because by design there are no \TeX{} @@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. {---} {} {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}} - + Another virtual encoding (with more than 600 characters) for Unicode-encoded bookmarks in PDF documents. \end{encodinginfo} @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ given in \cite{ziegler}. -\section{Restrictions} +\section{Restrictions} \label{sec:restrictions} @@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ accented. For example, |\v{c}| is the \textsc{licr} for `\v{c}'. \ttverb\textunderscore \>OT1,T1\> \textunderscore \> \\ \ttverb\textvisiblespace \>OT1,T1\> \textvisiblespace\> \\ \ttverb\th \>T1 \> \th \> -\end{tabbing} +\end{tabbing} \section{Encodings for Unicode based \TeX\ systems} \label{sec:unicode} @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ The restrictions described in section \ref{sec:restrictions} do not apply, or need to be modified in a Unicode based engine. Clearly the lowercase table (and hyphenation patterns) can not be restricted to the values used for \Enc{T1} and do only refer to the first 256 -characters. +characters. When the \LaTeX\ format is made \LaTeX\ sets up the lowercase table and classifies characters as letter- or non-letter-based on \Enc{T1} if @@ -1244,7 +1244,7 @@ avoid any need to manipulate \verb=\lccode= in the document.) \begin{thebibliography}{99} \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\numberline{\relax}\refname} - + \bibitem{Adobe:PDF-1.6} \emph{\textsc{PDF} reference}: Adobe portable document format version~1.6. Adobe Systems @@ -1310,9 +1310,9 @@ Michael~J. Ferguson. \bibitem{tub:JKn93} J\"org Knappen. -\newblock Fonts for Africa: The fc Fonts. +\newblock Fonts for Africa: The fc Fonts. \newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 14(2):104, 1993. - + \bibitem{Knappen:TB17-2-96} J\"org Knappen: \emph{The \Pkg{dc} fonts~1.3: Move towards stability and completeness}. In: TUGBoat 17\#2, 1996. @@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ J\"org Knappen. \bibitem{A-W:DKn86} Donald~E. Knuth. \newblock {\em The {\TeX}book}. -\newblock Volume~A of {\em Computers \& {T}ypesetting\/}, +\newblock Volume~A of {\em Computers \& {T}ypesetting\/}, May 1989. \newblock Eight printing. @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. \url{http://unicode.org/ucd}. \bibitem{ziegler} Justin Ziegler, \emph{Technical - Report on Math Font Encodings}, June 1994, + Report on Math Font Encodings}, June 1994, \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/ltx3pub/l3d007.ps.gz}. \end{thebibliography} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/exscale.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/exscale.pdf Binary files differindex 3ecafce412c..eb69ff3eab3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/exscale.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/exscale.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf Binary files differindex 813889ed9bf..f81921ce0ca 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf Binary files differindex 839d8b942ae..ae007a4246a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex index f3231a8183d..f19e0de7ba1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex @@ -1,206 +1,203 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: fntguide.tex - + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] - + \documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] - + \title{\LaTeXe{} font selection} - + \author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.} - -\date{July 2019} - + +\date{October 2019} + \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \tableofcontents - + \section{Introduction} - + This document describes the new font selection features of the \LaTeX{} Document Preparation System. It is intended for package writers who want to write font-loading packages similar to |times| or |latexsym|. -This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and -is intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and +This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and is +intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and \LaTeX{} packages. It is \emph{neither} a user-guide \emph{nor} a reference manual for fonts in \LaTeXe. - + \subsection{\LaTeXe~fonts} - + The most important difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is the way that fonts are selected. In \LaTeX~2.09, the Computer Modern fonts were built into the \LaTeX~format, and so customizing \LaTeX{} to use other fonts was a major effort. - + In \LaTeXe, very few fonts are built into the format, and there are commands to load new text and math fonts. Packages such as |times| or -|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts. -This document describes how to write similar font-loading packages. - +|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts. This document describes +how to write similar font-loading packages. + The \LaTeXe{} font selection system was first released as the `New Font Selection Scheme' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. - + \subsection{Overview} - -This document contains an overview of the new font commands -of \LaTeX. - + +This document contains an overview of the new font commands of \LaTeX. + \begin{description} - + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:text}] describes the commands for selecting fonts - in classes and packages. It lists the five \LaTeX{} font - attributes, and lists the commands for selecting fonts. It also - describes how to customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and - |\textit| to suit your document design. - + in classes and packages. It lists the five \LaTeX{} font attributes, + and lists the commands for selecting fonts. It also describes how to + customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and |\textit| to suit + your document design. + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:math}] explains the commands for controlling - \LaTeX{} math fonts. It describes how to specify new math fonts and - new math symbols. - + \LaTeX{} math fonts. It describes how to specify new math fonts and + new math symbols. + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:install}] explains how to install new fonts into - \LaTeX. It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} - font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition - files. - -\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings. - It describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define - commands, such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in - different encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are - available in the encoding. - + \LaTeX. It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} + font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition + files. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings. It + describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define commands, + such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in different + encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are available in the + encoding. + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:misc}] covers font miscellanea. It describes how - \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are - preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in - \LaTeX{} font selection. - + \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are + preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in + \LaTeX{} font selection. + \end{description} - + \subsection{Further information} - + For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of -\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, -Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. - +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, Leslie Lamport, Addison +Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. + A more detailed description of the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is to -be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, 2nd~ed, by Mittelbach and Goossens, Addison -Wesley, 2004. - +be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, 2nd~ed, by Mittelbach and Goossens, +Addison Wesley, 2004. + The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3. - + Sebastian Rahtz's |psnfss| software contains the software for using a large number of Type~1 fonts (including the Adobe Laser Writer 35 and the Monotype CD-ROM fonts) in \LaTeX. It should be available from the same source as your copy of \LaTeX. - -The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's -|fontinst| software. This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric -format into a format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of -the font definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. The -|fontinst| software should be available from the same source as your -copy of \LaTeX. - + +The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's |fontinst| +software. This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric format into a +format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of the font +definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. The |fontinst| +software should be available from the same source as your copy of +\LaTeX. + Whenever practical, \LaTeX{} uses the font naming scheme called `fontname'; this was described in \emph{Filenames for fonts},% -\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version -of this document can be found on any CTAN server, in the directory -\texttt{info/fontname}.} +\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version of this document can be found + on any CTAN server, in the directory \texttt{info/fontname}.} \emph{TUGboat}~11(4),~1990. -The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes -the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes and packages -and is kept in |clsguide.tex|. Configuring -\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in -\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on -modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in +The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes the new \LaTeX{} +features for writers of document classes and packages and is kept in +|clsguide.tex|. Configuring \LaTeX{} is covered by the guide +\emph{\cfgguide} in \texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind +our policy on modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in \texttt{modguide.tex}. - -The documented source code (from the files used to produce -the kernel format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as -\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}. -This very large document also includes an index of \LaTeX{} -commands. It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file |source2e.tex| -in the |base| directory; this uses the class file |ltxdoc.cls|. + +The documented source code (from the files used to produce the kernel +format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as \emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}. +This very large document also includes an index of \LaTeX{} commands. +It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file |source2e.tex| in the |base| +directory; this uses the class file |ltxdoc.cls|. For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group. Addresses and other details can be found at: \begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} - \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html} + \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html} \end{quote} \section{Text fonts} \label{Sec:text} - + This section describes the commands available to class and package writers for specifying and selecting fonts. - + \subsection{Text font attributes} - +\label{sec:textfontattributes} + Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: \begin{description} - + \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the - font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are - Knuth's `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended' - encoding developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} - Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding'). - + font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are Knuth's + `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended' encoding + developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} Conference + at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding'). + \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under - a common name by the font foundry. For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC - Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families. - + a common name by the font foundry. For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC + Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families. + \item[series] How heavy and/or expanded a font is. For example, `medium - weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series. - -\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For - example, `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called - `roman') are all font shapes. - + weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series. + +\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For example, + `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called `roman') are all + font shapes. + \item[size] The design size of the font, for example `10pt'. If no - dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed. - + dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed. + \end{description} The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are: \begin{center} -\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} - \begin{tabular}{rl} + \begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} |OT1| & \TeX{} text \\ |T1| & \TeX{} extended text \\ |OML| & \TeX{} math italic \\ @@ -208,18 +205,18 @@ The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by |OMX| & \TeX{} math large symbols \\ |U| & Unknown \\ |L<xx>| & A local encoding - \end{tabular} -\end{minipage} + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} \end{center} The `local' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only -locally available, for example a font containing an organization's -logo in various sizes. - +locally available, for example a font containing an organization's logo +in various sizes. + There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common ones are: \begin{center} -\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} - \begin{tabular}{rl} + \begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} |cmr| & Computer Modern Roman \\ |cmss| & Computer Modern Sans \\ |cmtt| & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ @@ -229,38 +226,38 @@ ones are: |ptm| & Adobe Times \\ |phv| & Adobe Helvetica \\ |pcr| & Adobe Courier - \end{tabular} -\end{minipage} + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} \end{center} \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} The font series is denoting a combination of the weight (boldness) and -the width (amount of expansion). The standard supported for weights -and widths are: +the width (amount of expansion). The standard supported for weights and +widths are: \begin{center} %\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - |ul| & Ultra Light \\ - |el| & Extra Light \\ - |l| & Light \\ - |sl| & Semi Light \\ - |m| & Medium (normal)\\ - |sb| & Semi Bold \\ - |b| & Bold \\ - |eb| & Extra Bold \\ - |ub| & Ultra Bold \\ - \end{tabular} -\qquad - \begin{tabular}{rlr} - |uc| & Ultra Condensed & 50\% \\ - |ec| & Extra Condensed & 62.5\% \\ - |c| & Condensed & 75\% \\ - |sc| & Semi Condensed & 87.5\% \\ - |m| & Medium & 100\% \\ - |sx| & Semi Expanded & 112.5\% \\ - |x| & Expanded & 125\% \\ - |ex| & Extra Expanded & 150\% \\ - |ux| & Ultra Expanded & 200\% \\ - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |ul| & Ultra Light \\ + |el| & Extra Light \\ + |l| & Light \\ + |sl| & Semi Light \\ + |m| & Medium (normal)\\ + |sb| & Semi Bold \\ + |b| & Bold \\ + |eb| & Extra Bold \\ + |ub| & Ultra Bold \\ + \end{tabular} + \qquad + \begin{tabular}{rlr} + |uc| & Ultra Condensed & 50\% \\ + |ec| & Extra Condensed & 62.5\% \\ + |c| & Condensed & 75\% \\ + |sc| & Semi Condensed & 87.5\% \\ + |m| & Medium & 100\% \\ + |sx| & Semi Expanded & 112.5\% \\ + |x| & Expanded & 125\% \\ + |ex| & Extra Expanded & 150\% \\ + |ux| & Ultra Expanded & 200\% \\ + \end{tabular} \end{center} These are concatenated to a single series value except that |m| is dropped unless both weight and width are medium in which case a single @@ -268,56 +265,55 @@ dropped unless both weight and width are medium in which case a single Examples for series values are then: \begin{center} -\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - |m| & Medium weight and width \\ - |b| & Bold weight, medium width \\ - |bx| & Bold extended \\ - |sb| & Semi-bold, medium width\\ - |sbx| & Semi-bold extended\\ - |c| & Medium weight, condensed width - \end{tabular} -\end{minipage} + \begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |m| & Medium weight and width \\ + |b| & Bold weight, medium width \\ + |bx| & Bold extended \\ + |sb| & Semi-bold, medium width\\ + |sbx| & Semi-bold extended\\ + |c| & Medium weight, condensed width + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} \end{center} \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} Note, that there are a large variety of names floating around like ``regular'', ``black'', ``demi-bold'', ``thin'', ``heavy'' and many -more. If at all possible they should be matched into the standard -naming scheme to allow for sensible default substitutions if -necessary, e.g., ``demi-bold'' is normally just another name for -``semi-bold'', so should get |sb| assigned, etc. +more. If at all possible they should be matched into the standard +naming scheme to allow for sensible default substitutions if necessary, +e.g., ``demi-bold'' is normally just another name for ``semi-bold'', so +should get |sb| assigned, etc. The most common values for the font shape are: \begin{center} -\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - |n| & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\ - |it| & Italic \\ - |sl| & Slanted (or `oblique') \\ - |sc| & Caps and small caps - \end{tabular} -\end{minipage} + \begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |n| & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\ + |it| & Italic \\ + |sl| & Slanted (or `oblique') \\ + |sc| & Caps and small caps + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} \end{center} -The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or -|1.5in| or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed. These five +The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or |1.5in| +or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed. These five parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, for example: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}} - \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} & - \emph{Font} & - \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\ - |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| & - Computer Modern Roman 10 point & - |cmr10| \\ - |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| & - Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & - |cmssi12| \\ - |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| & - Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & - |cmmi10| \\ - |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| & - Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & - |ptmb8t at 1in| + \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}} + \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} + & \emph{Font} & \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\ + |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| + & Computer Modern Roman 10 point + & |cmr10| \\ + |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| + & Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica + & |cmssi12| \\ + |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| + & Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point + & |cmmi10| \\ + |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| + & Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch + & |ptmb8t at 1in| \end{tabular} \end{center} These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull @@ -328,55 +324,54 @@ box warning, for example: \end{verbatim} The author commands for fonts set the five attributes: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{rcl} - \emph{Author command} & - \emph{Attribute} & - \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\ - |\textnormal{..}| or |\normalfont| & family & |cmr| \\ - |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily| & family & |cmr| \\ - |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily| & family & |cmss| \\ - |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily| & family & |cmtt| \\ - |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries| & series & |m| \\ - |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries| & series & |bx| \\ - |\textup{..}| or |\upshape| & shape & |n| \\ - |\textit{..}| or |\itshape| & shape & |it| \\ - |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape| & shape & |sl| \\ - |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape| & shape & |sc| \\ - |\tiny| & size & |5pt| \\ - |\scriptsize| & size & |7pt| \\ - |\footnotesize| & size & |8pt| \\ - |\small| & size & |9pt| \\ - |\normalsize| & size & |10pt| \\ - |\large| & size & |12pt| \\ - |\Large| & size & |14.4pt| \\ - |\LARGE| & size & |17.28pt| \\ - |\huge| & size & |20.74pt| \\ - |\Huge| & size & |24.88pt| - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{rcl} + \emph{Author command} & \emph{Attribute} + & \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\ + |\textnormal{..}| or |\normalfont| & family & |cmr| \\ + |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily| & family & |cmr| \\ + |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily| & family & |cmss| \\ + |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily| & family & |cmtt| \\ + |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries| & series & |m| \\ + |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries| & series & |bx| \\ + |\textup{..}| or |\upshape| & shape & |n| \\ + |\textit{..}| or |\itshape| & shape & |it| \\ + |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape| & shape & |sl| \\ + |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape| & shape & |sc| \\ + |\tiny| & size & |5pt| \\ + |\scriptsize| & size & |7pt| \\ + |\footnotesize| & size & |8pt| \\ + |\small| & size & |9pt| \\ + |\normalsize| & size & |10pt| \\ + |\large| & size & |12pt| \\ + |\Large| & size & |14.4pt| \\ + |\LARGE| & size & |17.28pt| \\ + |\huge| & size & |20.74pt| \\ + |\Huge| & size & |24.88pt| + \end{tabular} \end{center} The values used by these commands are determined by the document class, using the parameters defined in Section~\ref{Sec:text.param}. - + Note that there are no author commands for selecting new encodings. These should be provided by packages, such as the |fontenc| package. - + This section does not explain how \LaTeX{} font specifications are turned into \TeX{} font names. This is described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. - + \subsection{Selection commands} - + The low-level commands used to select a text font are as follows. - + \begin{decl} -|\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\ -|\fontfamily| \arg{family}\\ -|\fontseries| \arg{series}\\ -|\fontshape| \arg{shape}\\ -|\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip}\\ -|\linespread| \arg{factor} + |\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\ + |\fontfamily| \arg{family} \\ + |\fontseries| \arg{series} \\ + |\fontshape| \arg{shape} \\ + |\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip} \\ + |\linespread| \arg{factor} \end{decl} - + \NEWdescription{1998/12/01} Each of the commands starting with |\font...| sets one of the font attributes; |\fontsize| also sets |\baselineskip|. The |\linespread| @@ -387,17 +382,15 @@ values greater one). The actual font in use is not altered by these commands, but the current attributes are used to determine which font and baseline skip to use after the next |\selectfont| command. - \begin{decl} -|\selectfont| + |\selectfont| \end{decl} Selects a text font, based on the current values of the font attributes. - -\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command -immediately after any settings of the font parameters by (some of) -the six commands above, before any following text. -For example, it is legal to say: + +\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command immediately +after any settings of the font parameters by (some of) the six commands +above, before any following text. For example, it is legal to say: \begin{verbatim} \fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\selectfont Some text. \end{verbatim} @@ -407,38 +400,36 @@ but it is \emph{not} legal to say: \end{verbatim} You may get unexpected results if you put text between a |\font<parameter>| command (or |\linespread|) and a |\selectfont|. - + \begin{decl} -|\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} + |\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} \end{decl} -A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a -call to |\selectfont|. - - +A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a call +to |\selectfont|. + \subsection{Internals} - + The current values of the font attributes are held in internal macros. - + \begin{decl} - |\f@encoding| \\ - |\f@family| \\ - |\f@series| \\ - |\f@shape| \\ - |\f@size| \\ - |\f@baselineskip| \\ - |\tf@size| \\ - |\sf@size| \\ - |\ssf@size| + |\f@encoding| \\ + |\f@family| \\ + |\f@series| \\ + |\f@shape| \\ + |\f@size| \\ + |\f@baselineskip| \\ + |\tf@size| \\ + |\sf@size| \\ + |\ssf@size| \end{decl} - + These hold the current values of the encoding, the family, the series, -the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the -`script' math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three -are accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain +the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the `script' +math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three are +accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain arbitrary values. - -For example, to set the size to 12 without -changing the baseline skip: + +For example, to set the size to 12 without changing the baseline skip: \begin{verbatim} \fontsize{12}{\f@baselineskip} \end{verbatim} @@ -446,10 +437,10 @@ However, you should \emph{never} alter the values of the internal commands directly; they must only be modified using the low-level commands like |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, etc. If you disobey this warning you might produce code that loops. - + \subsection{Parameters for author commands} \label{Sec:text.param} - + The parameter values set by author commands such as |\textrm| and |\rmfamily|, etc.\ are not hard-wired into \LaTeX; instead these commands use the values of a number of parameters set by the document @@ -462,114 +453,110 @@ specifies: \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} - |\encodingdefault| \\ - |\familydefault| \\ - |\seriesdefault| \\ - |\shapedefault| + |\encodingdefault| \\ + |\familydefault| \\ + |\seriesdefault| \\ + |\shapedefault| \end{decl} The encoding, family, series and shape of the main body font. By -default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|. Note that since -the default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing -|\rmdefault| will change the main body font of the document. - +default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|. Note that since the +default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing |\rmdefault| +will change the main body font of the document. + \begin{decl} - |\rmdefault| \\ - |\sfdefault| \\ - |\ttdefault| + |\rmdefault| \\ + |\sfdefault| \\ + |\ttdefault| \end{decl} -The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|, -|\sffamily|, |\texttt| and |\ttfamily|. By default these are |cmr|, -|cmss| and |cmtt|. - +The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|, |\sffamily|, +|\texttt| and |\ttfamily|. By default these are |cmr|, |cmss| and +|cmtt|. + \begin{decl} - |\bfdefault| \\ - |\mddefault| + |\bfdefault| \\ + |\mddefault| \end{decl} The series selected by |\textbf|, |\bfseries|, |\textmd| and -|\mdseries|. By default these are |bx| and |m|. -These values are suitable for the default families used. If other -fonts are used as standard document fonts (for example, certain -PostScript fonts) it might be necessary to adjust the value of -|\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few such families have a `bold -extended' series. An alternative (taken for the fonts provided by -|psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from |bx| series to |b| -series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations and the |ssub| -size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}. - - +|\mdseries|. By default these are |bx| and |m|. These values are +suitable for the default families used. If other fonts are used as +standard document fonts (for example, certain PostScript fonts) it might +be necessary to adjust the value of |\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few +such families have a `bold extended' series. An alternative (taken for +the fonts provided by |psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from +|bx| series to |b| series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations +and the |ssub| size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}. + \begin{decl} - |\itdefault| \\ - |\sldefault| \\ - |\scdefault| \\ - |\updefault| + |\itdefault| \\ + |\sldefault| \\ + |\scdefault| \\ + |\updefault| \end{decl} The shapes selected by |\textit|, |\itshape|, |\textsl|, |\slshape|, |\textsc|, |\scshape|, |\textup| and |\upshape|. By default these are |it|, |sl|, |sc| and |n|. - + Note that there are no parameters for the size commands. These should be defined directly in class files, for example: \begin{verbatim} \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont} \end{verbatim} More elaborate examples (setting additional parameters when the text -size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source -documentation for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|. - - +size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source documentation +for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|. + \subsection{Special font declaration commands} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} - \arg{shape} \arg{size} + |\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} \end{decl} - -Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font -that is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family}, -\m{series}, \m{shape}, and \m{size}. - + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font that +is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family}, \m{series}, +\m{shape}, and \m{size}. + The font is selected without any adjustments to baselineskip and other surrounding conditions. - + This example makes |{\picturechar .}| select a small dot very quickly: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFixedFont{\picturechar}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5} \end{verbatim} - - + \begin{decl} |\DeclareTextFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{font-switches} \end{decl} - -Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument. -The current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches} -and then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font. - -Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care -of any necessary italic correction (on either side). - + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument. The +current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches} and +then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font. + +Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care of +any necessary italic correction (on either side). + The following example shows how |\textrm| is defined by the kernel. \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily} \end{verbatim} - -To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic -shape of the main document font you could declare: + +To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic shape +of the main document font you could declare: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextFontCommand{\normalit}{\normalfont\itshape} \end{verbatim} - + This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if -\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined -is put in the transcript file. - +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined is put in +the transcript file. + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch} - \arg{math-switch} + |\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch} + \arg{math-switch} \end{decl} - + Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch (i.e.~used with the syntax |{<cmd>...}|) having the definition \m{text-switch} when used in text and the definition \m{math-switch} when used in a @@ -578,11 +565,11 @@ Math alphabet commands, like |\mathit|, when used within \m{math-switch} should not have an argument. Their use in this argument causes their semantics to change so that they here act as a font switch, as required by the usage of the \m{cmd}. - + This declaration is useful for setting up commands like |\rm| to behave as they did in \LaTeX~2.09. We strongly urge you \emph{not} to misuse this declaration to invent new font commands. - + The following example defines |\it| to produce the italic shape of the main document font if used in text and to switch to the font that would normally be produced by the math alphabet |\mathit| if used in a @@ -590,170 +577,166 @@ formula. \begin{verbatim} \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} \end{verbatim} - + This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if -\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined -is put in the transcript file. - - +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined is put in +the transcript file. + + \section{Math fonts} \label{Sec:math} - + This section describes the commands available to class and package writers for specifying math fonts and math commands. - + \subsection{Math font attributes} - + The selection of fonts within math mode is quite different to that of text fonts. - -Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such -as |\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math -alphabets}. These math alphabet commands affect only the font used + +Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such as +|\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math + alphabets}. These math alphabet commands affect only the font used for letters and symbols of type |\mathalpha| (see -Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument -will be left unchanged. The predefined math alphabets are: +Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument will +be left unchanged. The predefined math alphabets are: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{ccc} - \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ - |\mathnormal| & default & $abcXYZ$ \\ - |\mathrm| & roman & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\ - |\mathbf| & bold roman & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\ - |\mathsf| & sans serif & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\ - |\mathit| & text italic & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\ - |\mathtt| & typewriter & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\ - |\mathcal| & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$ - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |\mathnormal| & default & $abcXYZ$ \\ + |\mathrm| & roman & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathbf| & bold roman & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathsf| & sans serif & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathit| & text italic & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathtt| & typewriter & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathcal| & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$ + \end{tabular} \end{center} Other math fonts are selected implicitly by \TeX{} for symbols, with commands such as |\oplus| (producing $\oplus$) or with straight characters like |>>| or |+|. Fonts containing such math symbols are -called \emph{math symbol fonts}. The predefined math symbol fonts -are: +called \emph{math symbol fonts}. The predefined math symbol fonts are: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{ccc} - \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ - |operators| & symbols from |\mathrm| & $[\;+\;]$ \\ - |letters| & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\ - |symbols| & most \LaTeX{} symbols & $\leq*\geq$ \\ - |largesymbols| & large symbols & $\sum\prod\int$ + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |operators| & symbols from |\mathrm| & $[\;+\;]$ \\ + |letters| & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\ + |symbols| & most \LaTeX{} symbols & $\leq*\geq$ \\ + |largesymbols| & large symbols & $\sum\prod\int$ \end{tabular} \end{center} Some math fonts are both \emph{math alphabets} and \emph{math symbol -fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and + fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and |\mathnormal| and |letters| are the same font. - + Math fonts in \LaTeX{} have the same five attributes as text fonts: encoding, family, series, shape and size. However, there are no -commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed. -Instead, the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is -controlled by the \emph{math version}. For example, the |normal| math -version maps: +commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed. Instead, +the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is controlled by +the \emph{math version}. For example, the |normal| math version maps: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c} - \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} & - \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\ - \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} & - \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\ - |\mathnormal| & |letters| & |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| \\ - |\mathrm| & |operators| & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| \\ - |\mathcal| & |symbols| & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m| & |n| \\ - & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m| & |n| \\ - |\mathbf| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |bx| & |n| \\ - |\mathsf| & & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |n| \\ - |\mathit| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |it| \\ - |\mathtt| & & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m| & |n| - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c} + \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\ + \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\ + |\mathnormal| & |letters| & |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathrm| & |operators| & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathcal| & |symbols| & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m| & |n| \\ + & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathbf| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |bx| & |n| \\ + |\mathsf| & & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathit| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathtt| & & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m| & |n| + \end{tabular} \end{center} The |bold| math version is similar except that it contains bold fonts. The command |\boldmath| selects the |bold| math version. - + Math versions can only be changed outside of math mode. - + The two predefined math versions are: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - |normal| & the default math version \\ - |bold| & the bold math version - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |normal| & the default math version \\ + |bold| & the bold math version + \end{tabular} \end{center} Packages may define new math alphabets, math symbol fonts, and math versions. This section describes the commands for writing such packages. - + \subsection{Selection commands} - + There are no commands for selecting symbol fonts. Instead, these are selected indirectly through symbol commands like |\oplus|. Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands} explains how to define symbol commands. - + \begin{decl} - |\mathnormal{<math>}|\\ - |\mathcal{<math>}|\\ - |\mathrm{<math>}|\\ - |\mathbf{<math>}|\\ - |\mathsf{<math>}|\\ - |\mathit{<math>}|\\ - |\mathtt{<math>}| + |\mathnormal{<math>}| \\ + |\mathcal{<math>}| \\ + |\mathrm{<math>}| \\ + |\mathbf{<math>}| \\ + |\mathsf{<math>}| \\ + |\mathit{<math>}| \\ + |\mathtt{<math>}| \end{decl} -Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math -mode. For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces $x + -\mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$. - +Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math mode. +For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces +$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$. + \begin{decl} -|\mathversion{<version>}| + |\mathversion{<version>}| \end{decl} This command selects a math version; it can only be used outside math mode. For example, |\boldmath| is defined to be |\mathversion{bold}|. - + \subsection{Declaring math versions} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version} + |\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version} \end{decl} - + Defines \m{version} to be a math version. - + The newly declared version is initialized with the defaults for all symbol fonts and math alphabets declared so far (see the commands |\DeclareSymbolFont| and |\DeclareMathAlphabet|). - + If used on an already existing version, an information message is written to the transcript file and all previous |\SetSymbolFont| or -|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by -the math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a -virgin math version. - +|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by the +math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a virgin +math version. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathVersion{normal} \end{verbatim} - - + \subsection{Declaring math alphabets} \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} - \arg{series} \arg{shape} + |\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} \end{decl} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} If this is the first declaration for \m{math-alph} then a new math alphabet with this as its command name is created. - + The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to set, or reset, the default values for this math alphabet in all math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a particular math version by a |\SetMathAlphabet| command. If \m{shape} is empty then this \m{math-alph} is declared to be invalid -in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet| -command for a particular math version. +in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet| command +for a particular math version. -Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math -alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known -encoding scheme, i.e., has been previously declared. - +Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet +command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known encoding +scheme, i.e., has been previously declared. In these examples, |\foo| is defined for all math versions but |\baz|, by default, is defined nowhere. @@ -761,53 +744,50 @@ by default, is defined nowhere. \DeclareMathAlphabet{\foo}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n} \DeclareMathAlphabet{\baz}{OT1}{}{}{} \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\ - \null\hfill\arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} + |\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} \end{decl} - + Changes, or sets, the font for the math alphabet \m{math-alph} in math version \m{version} to \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}. - -Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet, -\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known -encoding scheme. - + +Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet, +\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known encoding +scheme. This example defines |\baz| for the `normal' math version only: \begin{verbatim} \SetMathAlphabet{\baz}{normal}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n} \end{verbatim} - + Note that this declaration is not used for all math alphabets: -Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|, -which is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have -been declared as symbol fonts. - - +Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|, which +is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have been +declared as symbol fonts. + \subsection{Declaring symbol fonts} \label{sec:symalph} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} - \arg{series} \arg{shape} + |\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} \end{decl} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} -If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new -symbol font with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned -to a new \TeX{} math group). - +If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new symbol font +with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned to a new +\TeX{} math group). + The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to set, or reset. the default values for this symbol font in \emph{all} -math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for -a particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command. - +math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a +particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command. + Checks that \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme. - - + For example, the following sets up the first four standard math symbol fonts: \begin{verbatim} @@ -816,125 +796,119 @@ fonts: \DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n} \DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n} \end{verbatim} - - + \begin{decl} -|\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\ - \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} + |\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} \end{decl} - -Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version} -to \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}. - -Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font, -\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a -declared encoding scheme. - - -For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold' -math version: + +Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version} to +\m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}. + +Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font, \m{version} +is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme. + +For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold' math +version: \begin{verbatim} \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n} \SetSymbolFont{letters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it} \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font} + |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font} \end{decl} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} -Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the -math alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions. - +Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the math +alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions. + Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{sym-font} is a symbol font. - Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm}{operators} \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal}{symbols} \end{verbatim} - -This declaration should be used in preference to -|\DeclareMathAlphabet| and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is -the same as a symbol font; this is because it makes better use of the -limited number (only 16) of \TeX's math groups. - + +This declaration should be used in preference to |\DeclareMathAlphabet| +and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is the same as a symbol +font; this is because it makes better use of the limited number (only +16) of \TeX's math groups. + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} Note that, whereas a \TeX{} math group is allocated to each symbol font -when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group -only when its command is used within a math formula. - +when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group only +when its command is used within a math formula. \subsection{Declaring math symbols} \label{Sec:math.commands} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} - \arg{slot} + |\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} + \arg{slot} \end{decl} - + The \m{symbol} can be either a single character such as `|>>|', or a macro name, such as |\sum|. - -Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type -\m{type} in slot \m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The -\m{type} can be given as a number or as a command: + +Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type \m{type} in slot +\m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be given as a +number or as a command: \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{ccc} - \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\ - |0| or |\mathord | & Ordinary & $\alpha$ \\ - |1| or |\mathop | & Large operator & $\sum$ \\ - |2| or |\mathbin | & Binary operation & $\times$ \\ - |3| or |\mathrel | & Relation & $\leq$ \\ - |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening & $\langle$ \\ - |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing & $\rangle$ \\ - |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation & $;$ \\ - |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$ - \end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\ + |0| or |\mathord | & Ordinary & $\alpha$ \\ + |1| or |\mathop | & Large operator & $\sum$ \\ + |2| or |\mathbin | & Binary operation & $\times$ \\ + |3| or |\mathrel | & Relation & $\leq$ \\ + |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening & $\langle$ \\ + |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing & $\rangle$ \\ + |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation & $;$ \\ + |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$ + \end{tabular} \end{center} Only symbols of type |\mathalpha| will be affected by math alphabet commands: within the argument of a math alphabet command they will produce the character in slot \m{slot} of that math alphabet's font. -Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol -(within one math version). - +Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol (within one +math version). + |\DeclareMathSymbol| allows a macro \m{symbol} to be redefined only if -it was previously defined to be a math symbol. It also checks that -the \m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font. - +it was previously defined to be a math symbol. It also checks that the +\m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{0}{letters}{"0B} \DeclareMathSymbol{\lessdot}{\mathbin}{AMSb}{"0C} \DeclareMathSymbol{\alphld}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"0C} \end{verbatim} - + \begin{decl} - |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} - \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ - \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} + |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} \end{decl} Defines \m{cmd} to be a math delimiter where the small variant is in -slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large -variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}. -Both symbol fonts must have been declared previously. - +slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large variant is +in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts +must have been declared previously. + Checks that \m{sym-font-i} are both declared symbol fonts. - -If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as -if it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using -\m{type}, \m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}. In other words, if a -command is defined as a delimiter then this automatically defines it -as a math symbol. + +If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as if +it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using \m{type}, +\m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}. In other words, if a command is defined +as a delimiter then this automatically defines it as a math symbol. \NEWdescription{1998/06/01} In case \m{cmd} is a single character such as `|[|', the same syntax is used. Previously the \arg{type} argument was not present (and thus the corresponding math symbol declaration had to be provided separately). - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68} @@ -942,163 +916,158 @@ Example: \DeclareMathDelimiter{(} {\mathopen}{operators}{"28} {largesymbols}{"00} \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot} + |\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot} \end{decl} - + Defines \m{cmd} to act as a math accent. - -The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in -\m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be either -|\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case the accent character -changes font when used in a math alphabet. - + +The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in \m{sym-font}. The +\m{type} can be either |\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case +the accent character changes font when used in a math alphabet. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13} \DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E} \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd} - \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ - \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} + |\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} \end{decl} - -Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in -slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the -large variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font -\m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts must have been declared -previously. - + +Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in slot +\m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large variant is in +slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts must +have been declared previously. + Example (probably the only use for it!): \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathRadical{\sqrt}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70} \end{verbatim} - + \subsection{Declaring math sizes} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size} - \arg{ss-size} + |\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size} + \arg{ss-size} \end{decl} - + Declares that \m{mt-size} is the (main) math text size, \m{s-size} is -the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used -in math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for -which no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript' -size will be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated -sizes or the best approximation (this may result in a warning -message). - -Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if, -for example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts -then you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}. - +the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used in +math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for which +no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript' size will +be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated sizes or the +best approximation (this may result in a warning message). + +Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if, for +example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts then +you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{14.4}{10}{7} \end{verbatim} - + \section{Font installation} \label{Sec:install} - + This section explains how \LaTeX's font attributes are turned into \TeX{} font specifications. - + \subsection{Font definition files} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} The description of how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} fonts is usually kept in a \emph{font definition file} (|.fd|). The -file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be -called |<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer -Modern Roman with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with -encoding |T1|. Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase -when used as part of file names. - -Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it -does not know (e.g.~if the document designer says +file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be called +|<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer Modern Roman +with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with encoding |T1|. +Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase when used as part of +file names. + +Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it does +not know (e.g.~if the document designer says |\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont|) then \LaTeX{} attempts to load the appropriate |.fd| file. ``Not known'' means: there was no |\DeclareFontFamily| declaration issued for this encoding/family -combination. If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is -issued and font substitutions are made. - -The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for -telling \LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family -combination. - +combination. If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is issued +and font substitutions are made. + +The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for telling +\LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family combination. + \subsection{Font definition file commands} - -\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands -from this subsection. + +\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands from +this subsection. Note that these commands can also be used outside a font definition -file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the -preamble of a document. - +file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the preamble +of a document. + \begin{decl} - |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| \end{decl} -The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command, -as described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command, as +described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: \begin{verbatim} \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}[1994/06/01 Adobe Times font definitions] \end{verbatim} - + Spaces within the arguments specific to font definition files are ignored to avoid surplus spaces in the document. If a real space is -necessary use |\space|. -\NEWdescription{2004/02/10}However, note that this is only true if the -declaration is made at top level! If used within the definition of -another command, within |\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar -places, then spaces within the argument will remain and may result in -incorrect table entries. +necessary use |\space|. +\NEWdescription{2004/02/10} +However, note that this is only true if the declaration is made at top +level! If used within the definition of another command, within +|\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar places, then spaces within +the argument will remain and may result in incorrect table entries. \begin{decl} -|\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings} + |\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings} \end{decl} - + Declares a font family \m{family} to be available in encoding scheme \m{encoding}. - -The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any -font with this encoding and family. - + +The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any font +with this encoding and family. + Checks that \m{encoding} was previously declared. - -This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in -the Cork encoding: + +This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in the +Cork encoding: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font=-1} \end{verbatim} - -Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily| -command, and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family -combination. - + +Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily| command, +and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family combination. + \begin{decl} |\DeclareFontShape| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape}\\ \null\hfill \arg{loading-info} \arg{loading-settings} \end{decl} - + Declares a font shape combination; here \m{loading-info} contains the information that combines sizes with external fonts. The syntax is complex and is described in Section~\ref{sec:loadinfo} below. - + The \m{loading-settings} are executed after loading any font with this -font shape. They are executed immediately after the -`loading-settings' which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so -they can be used to overwrite the settings made at the family level. - +font shape. They are executed immediately after the `loading-settings' +which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so they can be used to +overwrite the settings made at the family level. + Checks that the combination \m{encoding}\m{family} was previously declared via |\DeclareFontFamily|. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{% @@ -1109,356 +1078,351 @@ Example: <<12>> <<14.4>> <<17.28>> <<20.74>> <<24.88>> cmsl12 }{} \end{verbatim} -The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands, -which should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}. - +The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands, which +should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}. + \NEWfeature{1996/06/01} The font family declarations for the |OT1|-encoded fonts now all contain: \begin{verbatim} - \hyphenchar\font=`\- + \hyphenchar\font=`\- \end{verbatim} This enables the use of an alternative |\hyphenchar| in other encodings whilst maintaining the correct value for all fonts. \subsection{Font file loading information} \label{sec:loadinfo} - + The information which tells \LaTeX{} exactly which font (\texttt{.tfm}) files to load is contained in the \m{loading-info} part of a |\DeclareFontShape| declaration. This part consists of one or more \m{fontshape-decl}s, each of which has the following form: - + \begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l} - \m{fontshape-decl} & \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\ - \m{size-infos} & \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$ - \m{size-info} \\ - \m{size-info} & ``|<<|'' \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\ - \m{font-info} & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|'' $]$ - $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\ -\end{tabular} + \begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l} + \m{fontshape-decl} & \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\ + \m{size-infos} & \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$ + \m{size-info} \\ + \m{size-info} & ``|<<|'' \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\ + \m{font-info} & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|'' $]$ + $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\ + \end{tabular} \end{center} -The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range -for which this entry applies. - -If it contains a hyphen it is a -range: lower bound on the left (if missing, zero implied), upper bound -on the right (if missing, $\infty$ implied). For ranges, the -upper bound is \emph{not} included in the range and the lower bound is. - +The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range for which this +entry applies. + +If it contains a hyphen it is a range: lower bound on the left (if +missing, zero implied), upper bound on the right (if missing, $\infty$ +implied). For ranges, the upper bound is \emph{not} included in the +range and the lower bound is. + Examples: \begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{lll} - |<<10>>| & simple size& 10pt only\\ - |<<-8>>| & range& all sizes less than 8pt\\ - |<<8-14.4>>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt\\ - & & \ but less than 14.4pt\\ - |<<14.4->>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt + \begin{tabular}{lll} + |<<10>>| & simple size & 10pt only \\ + |<<-8>>| & range & all sizes less than 8pt \\ + |<<8-14.4>>| & range & all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt \\ + & & \ but less than 14.4pt \\ + |<<14.4->>| & range & all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt \end{tabular} \end{center} -If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any -intervening \m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}. - -The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}. -If not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed. - +If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any intervening +\m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}. + +The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}. If +not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed. + All the \m{size-info}s are inspected in the order in which they appear -in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the -requested size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font| -is non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next +in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the requested +size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font| is +non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next \m{size-info} is inspected. (See also |\DeclareSizeFunction|.) - -If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|, -\LaTeX{} tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only -ranges an error is returned. - - + +If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|, \LaTeX{} +tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only ranges an +error is returned. + \subsection{Size functions} \label{sec:sizefunct} - - + \LaTeX{} provides the following size functions, whose `inputs' are \m{fontarg} and \m{optarg} (when present). - + \begin{description} \item[`' (empty)] -Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If -\m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor. - + Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If + \m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor. + \item[s] -Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only -loggings. - + Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only + loggings. + \item[gen] -Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by -the user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt| - + Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by the + user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt| + \item[sgen] -Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. \item[genb] -\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} -Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by -the user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts. -e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|. - + \NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by the + user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts. + e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|. + \item[sgenb] -\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} -Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. - + \NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + \item[sub] -Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by -\m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}. - + Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by + \m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}. + \item[ssub] -Silent variant of `sub', only loggings. - + Silent variant of `sub', only loggings. + +\item[alias] + \NEWfeature{2019/10/15} + Same as `ssub' but with a different logging message. Intended for + cases where the substitution is only done to change the name, e.g., + going from \texttt{regular} series to the official name \texttt{m}. In + that case given a warning that some shape is not found is not correct. + \item[subf] -Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute -the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not -available in the requested size. - + Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute + the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not + available in the requested size. + \item[ssubf] -Silent variant of `subf', only loggings. - + Silent variant of `subf', only loggings. + \item[fixed] -Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size. -If present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used. - + Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size. If + present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used. + \item[sfixed] -Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings. - + Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings. \end{description} - -Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found -in the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files + +Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found in +the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files describing the Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth. - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code} + |\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code} \end{decl} - + Declares a size-function \m{name} for use in |\DeclareFontShape| commands. The interface is still under development but there should be no real need to a define new size functions. - + The \m{code} is executed when the size or size-range in |\DeclareFontShape| matches the user-requested size. - + The arguments of the size-function are automatically parsed and placed into |\mandatory@arg| and |\optional@arg| for use in \m{code}. Also available, of course, is |\f@size|, which is the user-requested size. - -To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font| -to contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for -the font to be loaded. - + +To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font| to +contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for the +font to be loaded. + This example sets up the `empty' size function (simplified): \begin{verbatim} \DeclareSizeFunction{} {\edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\f@size} \end{verbatim} - - + + \section{Encodings} \label{Sec:encode} - -This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and -how to declare commands for use with particular encodings. - + +This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and how +to declare commands for use with particular encodings. + \subsection{The \textsf{fontenc} package} - + Users can select new font encodings using the |fontenc| package. The -|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes -the default encoding. For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington -University Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the -default, an author types: +|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes the +default encoding. For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington University +Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the default, an +author types: \begin{verbatim} \usepackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc} \end{verbatim} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} For each font encoding \m{ENC} given as an option, this package loads -the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all -lower-case name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last -encoding in the option list. - +the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all lower-case +name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last encoding in +the option list. + The declarations in the encoding definition file |<enc>enc.def| for -encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and -telling \LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file -should contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}. - -The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text -encodings by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also -sets up various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are -available. -Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a -later stage. - -Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def| -and sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|. - -\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the `cmr' -family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times}) +encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and telling +\LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file should +contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}. + +The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text encodings +by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also sets up +various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are available. +Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a later +stage. + +Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def| and +sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|. + +\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the +`cmr' family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times}) that selects the fonts \emph{before} loading \texttt{fontenc} (this prevents the system from attempting to load any |T1|-encoded fonts from the `cmr' family). - - \subsection{Encoding definition file commands} \label{Sec:encode.def} - + \emph{Note}: An encoding definition file should contain only commands from this subsection. \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} As an exception it may also contain a |\DeclareFontsubstitution| declaration (described in \ref{sec:encoding-defaults}) to specify how -font substitution for this encoding should be handled. In that case -it is important that the values used point to a font that is guaranteed -to be available on all \LaTeX{} installations.\footnote{If the font +font substitution for this encoding should be handled. In that case it +is important that the values used point to a font that is guaranteed to +be available on all \LaTeX{} installations.\footnote{If the font encoding file is made available as part of a CTAN bundle, that could be a font that is provided together with that bundle, but it should not point to font which requires further installation steps and therefore may or may not be installed.} - \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} -As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible -(although normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly -within a class or package file. +As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible (although +normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly within a +class or package file. \emph{Warning}: Some aspects of the contents of font definition files are still under development. Therefore, the current versions of the -files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should -not be used as models for producing further such files. For further +files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should not +be used as models for producing further such files. For further information you should read the documentation in |ltoutenc.dtx|. - + \begin{decl} - |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| \end{decl} -The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| -command, described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command, +described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: \begin{verbatim} \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.def} [1994/06/01 Washington University Cyrillic encoding] \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings} - \arg{math-settings} + |\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings} + \arg{math-settings} \end{decl} - + Declares a new encoding scheme \m{encoding}. - -The \m{text-settings} are -declarations which are executed every time |\selectfont| changes the -encoding to be \m{encoding}. - -The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They -are executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is -called. - + +The \m{text-settings} are declarations which are executed every time +|\selectfont| changes the encoding to be \m{encoding}. + +The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They are +executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is called. + \NEWfeature{1998/12/01} It also saves the value of \m{encoding} in the macro |\LastDeclaredEncoding|. - + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{} \end{verbatim} - -Some author commands need to change their definition depending on -which encoding is currently in use. For example, in the |OT1| -encoding, the letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1| -encoding it is in slot |"C6|. So the definition of |\AE| has to -change depending on whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|. -The following commands allow this to happen. - + +Some author commands need to change their definition depending on which +encoding is currently in use. For example, in the |OT1| encoding, the +letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1| encoding it is in +slot |"C6|. So the definition of |\AE| has to change depending on +whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|. The following commands +allow this to happen. + \begin{decl} - |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} - \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} + |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \end{decl} -This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a -command which is specific to one encoding. For example, the -definition of |\k| in the |T1| encoding is: +This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a command +which is specific to one encoding. For example, the definition of |\k| +in the |T1| encoding is: \begin{verbatim} - \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1] - {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}} + \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1] + {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}} \end{verbatim} |\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as |\newcommand|. - -The resulting command is -robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is fragile. - -It does not produce an error if the command has already -been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. - + +The resulting command is robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is +fragile. + +It does not produce an error if the command has already been defined but +logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] - |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} - \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} + |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \end{decl} -This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that -if \m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the -definition is ignored. - +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that if +\m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the definition +is ignored. + \begin{decl} - |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} + |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} \end{decl} -This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the -encoding. For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding -is: +This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the encoding. +For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding is: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25} \end{verbatim} It does not produce an error if the command has already been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. - + \begin{decl} - |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} + |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} \end{decl} This command declares a text accent, with the accent taken from slot -\m{slot} in the encoding. For example, the definition of |\"| in -the |OT1| encoding is: +\m{slot} in the encoding. For example, the definition of |\"| in the +|OT1| encoding is: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127} \end{verbatim} -It does not produce an error if the command has already -been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. - +It does not produce an error if the command has already been defined but +logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + \begin{decl} - |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} - \arg{slot} + |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{slot} \end{decl} This command declares that the composite letter formed from applying \m{cmd} to \m{letter} is defined to be simply slot \m{slot} in the -encoding. The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or -a single command (such as |\i|). - - -For example, the definition of |\'{a}| -in the |T1| encoding could be declared like this: +encoding. The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or a +single command (such as |\i|). + +For example, the definition of |\'{a}| in the |T1| encoding could be +declared like this: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225} \end{verbatim} - -The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared -for this encoding, either by using -|\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|. - + +The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared for this +encoding, either by using |\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument +|\DeclareTextCommand|. + \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] - |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} - \arg{definition} + |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{definition} \end{decl} -This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows -for an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}. The main use -for this is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for -example: +This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows for +an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}. The main use for this +is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i} \end{verbatim} @@ -1466,66 +1430,64 @@ It has the same restrictions as |\DeclareTextComposite|. \begin{decl}[1998/12/01] - |\LastDeclaredEncoding| + |\LastDeclaredEncoding| \end{decl} This holds the name of the last encoding declared via -|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most -efficient encoding). It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument -of the above declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the -encoding, e.g. +|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most efficient +encoding). It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument of the above +declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the encoding, e.g. \begin{verbatim} - \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} - \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0} - \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1} + \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} + \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0} + \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1} \end{verbatim} This can be useful in cases where encoding files sharing common code -are generated from one source. - +are generated from one source. \subsection{Default definitions} - + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} The declarations used in encoding definition files define encoding-specific commands but they do not allow those commands to be -used without explicitly changing the encoding. For some commands, -such as symbols, this is not enough. For example, the~|OMS| encoding -contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the -command~|\S| whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly -selecting the encoding~|OMS|. - +used without explicitly changing the encoding. For some commands, such +as symbols, this is not enough. For example, the~|OMS| encoding +contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the command~|\S| +whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly selecting the +encoding~|OMS|. + \NEWdescription{1997/12/01} To allow this, \LaTeX{} has commands that declare default definitions -for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined -in the current encoding. For example, the default encoding for~|\S| +for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined in +the current encoding. For example, the default encoding for~|\S| is~|OMS|, and so in an encoding (such as |OT1|) which does not contain~|\S|, the~|OMS| encoding is selected in order to access this glyph. But in an encoding (such as~|T1|) which does contain~|\S|, the -glyph in that encoding is used. The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets -up several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS| +glyph in that encoding is used. The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets up +several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS| and~|OML|. \emph{Warning}: These commands should \emph{not} occur in encoding definition files, since those files should declare only commands for use -when that encoding has been selected. They should instead be placed -in packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are -known to be available. - +when that encoding has been selected. They should instead be placed in +packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are known +to be available. + \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] - |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} + |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} \end{decl} -This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default -definition. For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is -defined be be a circled `c' with: +This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default +definition. For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is +defined be a circled `c' with: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}} \end{verbatim} \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] - |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\ - |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\ + |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \end{decl} -These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a -default encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and -|\ae| is set to be |OT1| by: +These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a default +encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and |\ae| is set +to be |OT1| by: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1} \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1} @@ -1533,71 +1495,69 @@ default encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and Note that |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| can be used on any one-argument encoding-specific command, not just those defined with |\DeclareTextAccent|. Similarly, |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| can be -used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just -those defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|. - -For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|. - +used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just those +defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|. + +For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|. + \begin{decl}[1994/12/01] - |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} + |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} \end{decl} -This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that -if the command already has a default definition, then the definition -is ignored. This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols -which may be given `real' definitions by other packages. For example, -a package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying: +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that if +the command already has a default definition, then the definition is +ignored. This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols which +may be given `real' definitions by other packages. For example, a +package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying: \begin{verbatim} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{$\m@th\frac14$} \end{verbatim} - - \subsection{Encoding defaults} \label{sec:encoding-defaults} - + +\subsection{Encoding defaults} \label{sec:encoding-defaults} + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings} + |\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings} \end{decl} - + Declares \m{text-settings} and \m{math-settings} for all encoding schemes. These are executed before the encoding scheme dependent ones are executed so that one can use the defaults for the major cases and overwrite them if necessary using |\DeclareFontEncoding|. - + If |\relax| is used as an argument, the current setting of this default is left unchanged. - + This example is used by amsfonts.sty for accent positioning; it changes only the math settings: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{\relax}{\def\accentclass@{7}} \end{verbatim} - - + + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareFontSubstitution| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} - \arg{shape} + |\DeclareFontSubstitution| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \end{decl} - + Declares the default values for font substitution which will be used -when a font with encoding \m{encoding} -should be loaded but no font can be found with the current -attributes. - +when a font with encoding \m{encoding} should be loaded but no font can +be found with the current attributes. + These substitutions are local to the encoding scheme because the encoding scheme is never substituted! They are tried in the order -\m{shape} then \m{series} and finally \m{family}. +\m{shape} then \m{series} and finally \m{family}. \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} This declaration is normally done in an encoding definition file -(see~\ref{Sec:encode.def}), but can also be used in a class file or -the document preamble to alter the default for a specific encoding. - +(see~\ref{Sec:encode.def}), but can also be used in a class file or the +document preamble to alter the default for a specific encoding. + If no defaults are set up for an encoding, the values given by |\DeclareErrorFont| are used. - -The font specification for -\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} -must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| -before the |\begin{document}| is reached. - + +The font specification for \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| before the +|\begin{document}| is reached. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n} @@ -1624,84 +1584,79 @@ because such fonts do not exist. For further details, see \texttt{clsguide.tex}. \NEWdescription{1999/04/23} -In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in -order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, +In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in order +to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. The -table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well -with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause -problems when using other alphabets. As an experiment, it has now -been extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings. - +table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well with +the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause +problems when using other alphabets. As an experiment, it has now been +extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings. \section{Miscellanea} \label{Sec:misc} - + This section covers the remaining font commands in \LaTeX{} and some other issues. - + \subsection{Font substitution} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} - \arg{shape} \arg{size} + |\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} \end{decl} - + Declares \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} to be the font shape used in cases where the standard substitution mechanism fails (i.e.~would loop). For the standard mechanism see the command |\DeclareFontSubstitution| above. - -The font specification for -\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} -must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| -before the |\begin{document}| is reached. - + +The font specification for \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| before the +|\begin{document}| is reached. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} \end{verbatim} \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} -This declaration is a system wide fallback and it should normally not -be changed, in particular it does not belong into font encoding -definition files but rather into the \LaTeX{} format. It is normally -set up in \texttt{fonttext.cfg}. Adjustments on a per encoding base -should be made through |\DeclareFontSubstitution| instead! - - +This declaration is a system wide fallback and it should normally not be +changed, in particular it does not belong into font encoding definition +files but rather into the \LaTeX{} format. It is normally set up in +\texttt{fonttext.cfg}. Adjustments on a per encoding base should be made +through |\DeclareFontSubstitution| instead! + \begin{decl} -|\fontsubfuzz| + |\fontsubfuzz| \end{decl} - + This parameter is used to decide whether or not to produce a terminal warning if a font size substitution takes place. If the difference between the requested and the chosen size is less than |\fontsubfuzz| -the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value -is |0.4pt|. This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example: +the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value is +|0.4pt|. This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example: \begin{verbatim} \renewcommand{\fontsubfuzz}{0pt} % always warn \end{verbatim} - + \subsection{Preloading} - + \begin{decl} -|\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} - \arg{shape} + |\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size-list} \end{decl} - - + Specifies the fonts that should be preloaded by the format. These commands should be put in a |preload.cfg| file, which is read in when -the \LaTeX{} format is being built. -Read |preload.dtx| for more information on how to built such a -configuration file. - +the \LaTeX{} format is being built. Read |preload.dtx| for more +information on how to built such a configuration file. + Example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12} \end{verbatim} - + \NEWdescription{2019/07/10} Preloading is really an artifact of the days when loading fonts while processing a document contributed substantially to the processing @@ -1711,55 +1666,53 @@ time. These days it is usually best not to use this mechanism any more. \NEWdescription{1996/06/01} Accented characters in \LaTeX{} can be produced using commands such as -|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font +|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font encoding being used. When using a font encoding that contains the -accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding, -in the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can -be automatically hyphenated. For font encodings that do not contain -the requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a -command invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented -character as a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks -in the font. In most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{} -primitive |\accent|. Glyphs constructed as composites in this way -inhibit hyphenation of the current word; this is one reason why the -|T1| encoding is preferable to the original \TeX{} font encoding -|OT1|. +accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding, in +the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can be +automatically hyphenated. For font encodings that do not contain the +requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a command +invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented character as +a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks in the font. In +most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{} primitive |\accent|. +Glyphs constructed as composites in this way inhibit hyphenation of the +current word; this is one reason why the |T1| encoding is preferable to +the original \TeX{} font encoding |OT1|. It is important to understand that commands like |\"a| in \LaTeXe{} represent just a name for a single glyph (in this case `umlaut a') and contain no information about how to typeset that glyph---thus it does -\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'. The -decision as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the -encoding of the current font and so this decision is taken at the last -minute. Indeed, it is possible that the same input will be typeset in -more than one way in the same document; for example, text in section -headings may also appear in table of contents and in running heads; and -each of these may use a font with a different encoding. +\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'. The decision +as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the encoding of the +current font and so this decision is taken at the last minute. Indeed, +it is possible that the same input will be typeset in more than one way +in the same document; for example, text in section headings may also +appear in table of contents and in running heads; and each of these may +use a font with a different encoding. For this reason the notation |\"a| is \emph{not} equivalent to: \begin{verbatim} - \newcommand \chara {a} \"\chara + \newcommand \chara {a} \"\chara \end{verbatim} In the latter case, \LaTeX{} does not expand the macro |\chara| but simply compares the notation (the string |\"\chara|) to its list of -known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to -find |\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting +known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to find +|\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting instructions that put the umlaut accent on top of the expansion of |\chara|. Thus, even if the font actually contains `\"a' as an individual glyph, it will not be used. -The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way -that it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a -glyph from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce -\"\textparagraph. The umlaut here -is taken from the |OT1| encoded font |cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign -is from the |OMS| encoded font |cmsy10|. (This example may be -typographically silly but better ones would involve font encodings -like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be available at every -site.) - -There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that -will work within the argument to such an accent command. These are +The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way that +it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a glyph +from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce +\"\textparagraph. The umlaut here is taken from the |OT1| encoded font +|cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign is from the |OMS| encoded font +|cmsy10|. (This example may be typographically silly but better ones +would involve font encodings like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be +available at every site.) + +There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that will +work within the argument to such an accent command. These are \TeX{}nical in the sense that they follow from the way that \TeX{}'s |\accent| primitive works, allowing only a special class of commands between the accent and the accented character. @@ -1770,72 +1723,80 @@ arguments (|\textbf{...}| and friends); all the font size declarations (|\fontsize| and |\Large|, etc.); |\usefont| and declarations that depend on it, such as |\normalfont|; box commands (e.g.~|\mbox{...}|). -The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family, -series and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce -correct typesetting, as will the default declarations such as -|\bfseries|. - +The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family, series +and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce correct +typesetting, as will the default declarations such as |\bfseries|. \subsection{Naming conventions} - + \begin{itemize} \item -Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are -|\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc. - + Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are + |\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc. + \item -The text font changing commands with arguments all start with -|\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|. The exception to this is -|\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so -deserves a shorter name. - + The text font changing commands with arguments all start with + |\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|. The exception to this is + |\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so + deserves a shorter name. + \item -Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all -upper case) plus digits. - -The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the -following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS| -(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding), -|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for -|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other -symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard -128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings). - -Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable -encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in -a later release of \LaTeX. - -Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start -with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will -start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. - + Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all + upper case) plus digits. + + The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the + following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS| + (symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding), + |X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for + |T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other + symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard + 128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings). + + Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable + encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in + a later release of \LaTeX. + + Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start + with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will + start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. + \item -Font family names should contain up to five lower case letters. -Where possible, these should conform to the \emph{Filenames for fonts} -font naming scheme. - + \NEWdescription{2019/10/15} + Font family names should contain only upper and lower case letters and + hyphen characters. Where possible, these should conform to the + \emph{Filenames for fonts} font naming scheme of the scheme + implemented by \texttt{autoinst} with suffixes such as \texttt{-LF}, + \texttt{-OsF}, etc.\ to indicate different figure styles. + \item -Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters. - + \NEWdescription{2019/10/15} + Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters. If at + all possible standard names as suggested in + Section~\ref{sec:textfontattributes} should be used. Font specific + names such as \texttt{regular} or \texttt{black}, etc.\ should be at + least aliased to a corresponding standard name. + \item -Font shapes should contain up to two letters lower case. - + \NEWdescription{2019/10/15} + Font shapes should contain up to four letters lower case. Use the + names suggested in Section~\ref{sec:textfontattributes}. + \item -Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters -with no restriction. + Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters + with no restriction. \end{itemize} - + Whenever possible, you should use the series and shape names suggested -in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new -fonts with existing fonts. - +in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new fonts +with existing fonts. + \NEWdescription{1994/12/01} - Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by - the Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or - |\textsterling|. Similarly, math symbols should be named as - |\math| followed by the glyph name, for example |\mathonequarter| - or |\mathsterling|. Commands which can be used in text or math can - then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for example: +Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by the +Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or |\textsterling|. +Similarly, math symbols should be named as |\math| followed by the glyph +name, for example |\mathonequarter| or |\mathsterling|. Commands which +can be used in text or math can then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for +example: \begin{verbatim} \DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{% \ifmmode \mathsterling \else \textsterling \fi @@ -1844,46 +1805,95 @@ fonts with existing fonts. Note that commands defined in this way must be robust, in case they get put into a section title or other moving argument. +\subsection{The order of declaration} + +\NEWdescription{2019/10/15} +\NFSS{} forces you to give all declarations in a specific order so that +it can check whether you have specified all necessary information. If +you declare objects in the wrong order, it will complain. Here are the +dependencies that you have to obey: +\begin{itemize} +\item + |\DeclareFontFamily| checks that the encoding scheme was previously + declared with |\DeclareFontEncoding|. + +\item + |\DeclareFontShape| checks that the font family was declared to be + available in the requested encoding (|\DeclareFontFamily|). + +\item + |\DeclareSymbolFont| checks that the encoding scheme is valid. + +\item + |\SetSymbolFont| additionally ensures that the requested math version + was declared (|\DeclareMathVersion|) and that the requested symbol + font was declared (|\DeclareSymbolFont|). + +\item + |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| checks that the command name for the + alphabet identifier can be used and that the symbol font was declared. + +\item + |\DeclareMathAlphabet| checks that the chosen command name can be used + and that the encoding scheme was declared. + +\item + |\SetMathAlphabet| checks that the alphabet identifier was previously + declared with |\DeclareMathAlphabet| or |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| + and that the math version and the encoding scheme are known. + +\item + |\DeclareMathSymbol| makes sure that the command name can be used + (i.e., is undefined or was previously declared to be a math symbol) + and that the symbol font was previously declared. + +\item + When the |\begin{document}| command is reached, \NFSS{} makes some + additional checks---for example, verifying that substitution + defaults for every encoding scheme point to known font shape group + declarations. +\end{itemize} + + \section{If you need to know more \ldots} \NEWdescription{1996/06/01} The |tracefnt| package provides for tracing the actions concerned with -loading, substituting and using fonts. -The package accepts the following options: +loading, substituting and using fonts. The package accepts the +following options: \begin{description} -\item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but +\item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but only to the transcript file unless an error occurs. This means that - information about font substitution will not be shown on the - terminal. + information about font substitution will not be shown on the terminal. -\item[warningshow] Show all font warnings on the terminal. This - setting corresponds to the default behavior when this - \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} used! +\item[warningshow] Show all font warnings on the terminal. This setting + corresponds to the default behavior when this \texttt{tracefnt} + package is \emph{not} used! -\item[infoshow] Show all font warnings and all font info messages - (that are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the +\item[infoshow] Show all font warnings and all font info messages (that + are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the terminal. This is the default when this \texttt{tracefnt} package is loaded. -\item[debugshow] In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow}, - show also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this - option can produce a large amount of output. +\item[debugshow] In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow}, show + also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this option + can produce a large amount of output. -\item[loading] Show the names of external font files when they are +\item[loading] Show the names of external font files when they are loaded. This option shows only `newly loaded' fonts, not those already preloaded in the format or the class file before this \texttt{tracefnt} package becomes active. -\item[pausing] - Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop. +\item[pausing] Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will + stop. \end{description} \emph{Warning}: The actions of this package can change the layout of a -document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so -it should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'. +document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so it +should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'. \begin{thebibliography}{1} - + \bibitem{A-W:MG2004} Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. \newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. @@ -1894,12 +1904,18 @@ Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. Donald~E. Knuth. \newblock Typesetting concrete mathematics. \newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 10(1):31--36, April 1989. - + \bibitem{A-W:LLa94} Leslie Lamport. \newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. \newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. - + \end{thebibliography} - + \end{document} + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% TeX-master: t +%%% fill-column: 72 +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/graphpap.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/graphpap.pdf Binary files differindex 0729c84c83a..15c1cf44a06 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/graphpap.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/graphpap.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ifthen.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ifthen.pdf Binary files differindex 7118096e0dd..bfe0cd093f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ifthen.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ifthen.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/inputenc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/inputenc.pdf Binary files differindex 1e717982661..947f03a5bdd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/inputenc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/inputenc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf Binary files differindex 1e46371cf5e..d08cd03b2a7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.tex index 3c04b9362ed..c13f673b02f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexchanges.tex @@ -1,49 +1,49 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2015-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2015-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: latexchanges.tex - + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} - + \documentclass{ltxguide} - + \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{url} \title{Changes to the \LaTeXe{} format} - -\author{\copyright~Copyright 2015--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 2015--2020, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.} - -\date{2019-10-01} -% a few commands from doc +\date{2020-02-02} + +% a few commands from doc \newcommand\Lpack[1]{\mbox{\textsf{#1}}} \newcommand\DescribeMacro[1]{\texttt{\string#1}} @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ \hbox{\check@mathfonts\fontsize\ssf@size\z@ \math@fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup} \makeatother - + \ifx\href\undefined \newcommand\ghissue[1]{github #1} \newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{gnats #1} @@ -76,17 +76,17 @@ \fi \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \tableofcontents \newpage - + \section{Introduction} - -This document describes changes that have been made to the -\LaTeX\ format since the 2014/05/01 \LaTeX\ release. + +This document describes changes that were made to the +\LaTeX\ format since the 2014-05-01 \LaTeX\ releases. As announced in \ltnewsissue{22}, the 2015 \LaTeX{} release adopts a new @@ -94,6 +94,27 @@ policy. Improvements and bug fixes will be made to the format sources, with the \Lpack{latexrelease} package being available to revert changes to use definitions from an earlier format. +As a summary of changes for a main release will always be available in +\LaTeX\ News, detailed changes are not repeated in this document, +but changes in any patch releases will be listed in more +detail here. + +More detailed change logs are available as +\texttt{changes.txt} in the base distribution, and full code + differences may be browsed via the code repository on GitHub +see for example +\url{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/commits/master}. + + +\section{Changes introduced in 2020-02-02} + +Major enhancements in this release include pre-loading \Lpack{expl3} +to improve startup times, especially with Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX, and +extra features in the font selection mechanism. Please see +\ltnewsissue{31} for an overview of the new features and the change +log in \texttt{changelog.txt} for a more detailed list of individual +changes. + \section{Changes introduced in 2019-10-01 patch~3} @@ -187,7 +208,7 @@ The default action of the file \texttt{nfssfont.tex} was set to produce a font table, so that one can simply hit enter instead of having to write \verb=\table\bye=. -The \LaTeX{} kernel now provides dummy (empty) definitions for the +The \LaTeX{} kernel now provides dummy (empty) definitions for the two commands \verb|\conditionally@traceoff| and \verb|\conditionally@traceon| from the \texttt{trace} package so they can be used by package developers without worrying about them being @@ -278,7 +299,7 @@ In parboxes and similar settings, \verb|\lineskiplimit| is now reset (to the existing default value, \verb|\normallineskiplimit|). See \sxanswer{359934}. - The code for verb|\newpage| has been adjusted to add a test on the value of + The code for \verb|\newpage| has been adjusted to add a test on the value of \verb|\prevdepth| so that the depth of the last line is preserved in forced page breaks. @@ -298,7 +319,7 @@ Fixes to TU encoding definitions for Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX. A new test is added during format making that e\TeX\ extensions are available. As noted in \LaTeX\ news, e\TeX\ will now be required to build \LaTeX. - + Further updates tracking changes for Lua\TeX~1.0. The definition of \verb|\showhyphens| is changed in formats built @@ -337,7 +358,7 @@ This release fixes the behaviour of the allocation mechanism if the switch from the standard to extended pool takes place within a group. \section{Changes introduced in 2015/10/01 patch~1} -This release allows \Lpack{latexrelease} to revert the +This release allows \Lpack{latexrelease} to revert the Lua\TeX{}-specific changes, in particular fixing an incorrect date in part of the mechanism and adding a method to disable callback management entirely. @@ -379,7 +400,7 @@ affecting bottom float positioning if the \Lpack{latexrelease} package was used. \section{Changes introduced in 2015/01/01 patch~1} This release re-introduces the ``Patch Level'' scheme for identifying releases between main ``dated'' releases. Early \LaTeXe\ releases -included a mechanism whereby updates could be provided by a +included a mechanism whereby updates could be provided by a \emph{patch file}. This was mainly intended to allow updates to be made without downloading the full sources again, which was an important @@ -454,7 +475,7 @@ Allocates commands to use the extended e-\TeX\ mark mechanism. \smallskip Xe-\TeX\ only, previously in the Xe-\LaTeX\ format, but added via -|xelatex.ini| not part of the core release. +|xelatex.ini| not part of the core release. Allocates commands to use the Xe-\TeX\ character class mechanism. @@ -698,7 +719,7 @@ macros robust: |\(|, |\)|, |\[|, |\]|, |\makebox|, |\savebox|, |\framebox|, |\parbox|, |\rule| and |\raisebox|. -\ldots TODO \ldots fleqn vesion of |\[\]| +\ldots TODO \ldots fleqn vesion of |\[\]| \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash addpenalty} ruins flush-bottom (pr/3073)} @@ -853,5 +874,5 @@ which was supposed to be math-mode. We have decided upon 1) as is customary for regular robust commands in \LaTeX. - + \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf Binary files differindex 86b202f0ae5..cf2029207f0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexsym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexsym.pdf Binary files differindex b689b79ed7f..c7b87bb1ff0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexsym.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexsym.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.err index fa8694c5e26..47dc4010c23 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.err +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.err @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ \begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} %% %% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach -%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; %% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl % % @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ % Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting % % hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for -% errata files of other books. +% errata files of other books. % % Changes: % @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ % some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: -\let\u\underline +\let\u\underline \renewcommand\>{$\to$} %%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ \def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% %%% also count secondary: -%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% } \renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp } - + \renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil \endgobble @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ } \renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% - \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} \end{filecontents} @@ -242,12 +242,12 @@ \begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} % % -% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% Configuration file for the errata listing of % % Der LaTeX-Begleiter 2 Auflage % % -% \erratastartdate +% \erratastartdate % % Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. % @@ -269,8 +269,8 @@ % listing. % % The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the second -% printing are typeset. -% +% printing are typeset. +% % \renewcommand\myprinting{2} @@ -385,10 +385,10 @@ speziellen Nachdruck oder ab einem gewünschten Datum angezeigt werden. \begin{center} - \Large \bfseries Irren ist menschlich -- Fehlerwettbewerb + \Large \bfseries Irren ist menschlich -- Fehlerwettbewerb \end{center} - + Jeder gefundene und mitgeteilte Fehler ist ein Gewinn für alle Leser und Käufer unseres Buches. Aus diesem Grund schreiben wir, Pearson Studium und die Autoren, einen Preis aus -- halbjährlich, später (mehr)jährlich -- den @@ -396,18 +396,18 @@ die Person erhält, die die meisten Fehler innerhalb dieser Zeit findet (im Falle einer Überschneidung wird das Los zwischen den "`besten"' Fehlersuchern entscheiden). Eine Person kann nur einmal einen Preis bekommen; Fehler die durch die Autoren gefunden werden, zählen nicht. -\begin{center} -Ihr Preis: Ein Lehrbuch Ihrer Wahl! +\begin{center} +Ihr Preis: Ein Lehrbuch Ihrer Wahl! \end{center} Auswählen können Sie dieses unter \url{http://www.pearson-studium.de}. (Bundles und mehrbändige Bücher sind davon ausgenommen). - + Wie üblich behalten sich die Autoren und der Verlag das Recht vor, selbst zu entscheiden ob ein Fehler tatsächlich als Fehler anzusehen ist oder ob ein wiederholt vorkommender Fehler als ein oder mehrere Fehler gezählt wird. - -- Viel Erfolg - + +- Viel Erfolg - \begin{center} \begin{tabular}{clr@{ Eingaben}} @@ -439,9 +439,9 @@ Ende der Wettbewerbsperiode & Gewinner \\[4pt] \fi \erroronpage{}{}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{} - Einzelne Teile mehrgliedriger Abkürzungen werden im deutschsprachigen - Satz normalerweise durch einen kleinen Zwischenraum (Spatium) getrennt; nur in - englischsprachigen Texten wird zwischen den Abkürzungsteilen kein + Einzelne Teile mehrgliedriger Abkürzungen werden im deutschsprachigen + Satz normalerweise durch einen kleinen Zwischenraum (Spatium) getrennt; nur in + englischsprachigen Texten wird zwischen den Abkürzungsteilen kein Zwischenraum gesetzt. Beispiele: z.\,B., u.\,a.\ anstatt z.B., u.a. @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ should be ``Francis\u{c}o''. Das Kommando lautet \verb=\AskOption= (ohne ``s'') \erroronpage{26}{Abs.-3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} - Zur schließenden Klammer in Zeile 5 gibt es keine öffnende; es sollte wohl + Zur schließenden Klammer in Zeile 5 gibt es keine öffnende; es sollte wohl heißen: (zum Beispiel \ldots{} \erroronpage{29}{Abs. nach 2-2-3, Z.7}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} @@ -493,11 +493,11 @@ Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. \erroronpage{56}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} -Hier fehlt ein Buchstabe: ``Das Beispiel zeigt, das\u{s} es +Hier fehlt ein Buchstabe: ``Das Beispiel zeigt, das\u{s} es wahrscheinlich''. \erroronpage{59}{2.3.6 Abs.\ 4, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`Um das \textsf{minitoc}-System zu initialisieren, + Füge Komma ein: "`Um das \textsf{minitoc}-System zu initialisieren, muss ein \dots{}"' \erroronpage{60}{Tab.2.3, rechte Spalte, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Es muss ``Ein solcher Wechsel'' statt ``Eine solcher Wechsel'' heißen. \LaTeX-Trennfehler: Verzeichnis-eintr"age statt Verzeichni-seintr"age. \erroronpage{70}{Abs.-1, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} -Hier fehlt ein Komma am Ende der ersten Zeile und ein Punkt am Ende des +Hier fehlt ein Komma am Ende der ersten Zeile und ein Punkt am Ende des ersten Satzes. \erroronpage{73}{Abs.2, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. Hier fehlt ein Komma vor ``wenn sie durch''. \erroronpage{75}{Abs.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} -Es fehlen zwei Buchstaben: ``ohne daf"ur einen eigen\u{en} Abstand +Es fehlen zwei Buchstaben: ``ohne daf"ur einen eigen\u{en} Abstand einzuf"ugen''. @@ -540,12 +540,12 @@ Lösche s aus Grau\u{s}wertproblem Kein Komma vor und bei einer Aufzählung. \erroronpage{109}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Streiche Kommata: "`Möglich\_ und absolut nicht unwahrscheinlich\_ ist + Streiche Kommata: "`Möglich\_ und absolut nicht unwahrscheinlich\_ ist beispielsweise, \dots{}"' \erroronpage{114}{para 3}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2} Ersetze Absatz durch: "`Da es nicht empfehlenswert ist, die Einstellung von -|\baselineskip| +|\baselineskip| direkt zu ändern, verfügt \LaTeX{} über den Befehl |\lineskip|\,, mit dem sich |\baselineskip| global für alle Größen ändern lässt. Nach einer Anweisung wie etwa \verb!\linespread{1.5}\selectfont! tritt der neue @@ -558,22 +558,22 @@ Wert sofort in Kraft. [Fußnote: Die veraltete \LaTeX~2.09 Lösung \erroronpage{117}{3.2.1 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Trennung der Hauptsätze: "`\dots{} der Zähler \texttt{footnote} wird + Trennung der Hauptsätze: "`\dots{} der Zähler \texttt{footnote} wird weiter hochgesetzt, und die Darstellung erfolgt \dots{}"' \erroronpage{119}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Da die Beispiele unmittelbar folgen: "`\dots{} schematisch + Da die Beispiele unmittelbar folgen: "`\dots{} schematisch dargestellt \u{und bedeuten}:"' -%%Ebenfalls als Vorschlag zur Neuformulierung -- weil es um zwei -%%unterschiedliche Aspekte geht, sollte durch Punkt oder Semikolon +%%Ebenfalls als Vorschlag zur Neuformulierung -- weil es um zwei +%%unterschiedliche Aspekte geht, sollte durch Punkt oder Semikolon %%getrennt werden: % % -maybe differently \erroronpage{121}{3.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - "`\u{Es wird ausreichend} Abstand zwischen -Fußnoten und Text gelassen -und die Fußnoten werden in einem kleineren Schriftgrad + "`\u{Es wird ausreichend} Abstand zwischen +Fußnoten und Text gelassen +und die Fußnoten werden in einem kleineren Schriftgrad gesetzt."' @@ -594,8 +594,8 @@ Der \LaTeX{}-Begleiter sollte stets mit Bindestrich geschrieben werden. \erroronpage{149}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe/FMi}{2006/06/10}{2} -Ersetze: "`Bei vielen dieser Argumente wird der unten aufgeführte, voreingestellte -Wert verwendet, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird. +Ersetze: "`Bei vielen dieser Argumente wird der unten aufgeführte, voreingestellte +Wert verwendet, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird. \> "`Bei vielen dieser Argumente erhält man den unten aufgeführten voreingestellten Wert, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird."' @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Wert, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird."' -\erroronpage{149}{Argument \textit{kopf-nach-abstand}, Z.\ +\erroronpage{149}{Argument \textit{kopf-nach-abstand}, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} Streiche Anführungszeichen bei "`Interpunktion"'. @@ -617,11 +617,11 @@ Wert, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird."' leben muss. \erroronpage{159}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - "`\dots{} unverändert, also "`wie über die Tastatur eingegeben"'\u{,} + "`\dots{} unverändert, also "`wie über die Tastatur eingegeben"'\u{,} darstellen."' \erroronpage{160}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Anstelle "`extensiv"': "`\dots{} in der Vergangenheit \emph{intensiv} + Anstelle "`extensiv"': "`\dots{} in der Vergangenheit \emph{intensiv} genutzt wurden, \dots{}"' \erroronpage{163}{Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Streiche das zweite t aus setz\u{t}en. % - but also a national one, so could stay % % \erroronpage{204}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{} -% Streiche "`DIN"' in "`DIN A4"', da A4 nationaler (DIN 476), +% Streiche "`DIN"' in "`DIN A4"', da A4 nationaler (DIN 476), % europ\"{a}ischer (EN 20 216) und internationaler (ISO 216) Standard ist. \erroronpage{205}{Tab.\ 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{} @@ -667,21 +667,21 @@ Streiche das zweite t aus setz\u{t}en. \erroronpage{205}{4.2, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht v\"{o}llig unm\"{o}glich ist\u, sie + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht v\"{o}llig unm\"{o}glich ist\u, sie \dots{} zu \"{a}ndern, \dots{}"'. \erroronpage{208}{Z. 1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} Fehlendes Komma: "`zwei Pakete\u, mit deren"' \erroronpage{210}{Abs.\ 5, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - Streiche Komma vor der Klammer: "`\dots{} von Listen Verwendung + Streiche Komma vor der Klammer: "`\dots{} von Listen Verwendung finden\_ (\dots{})."' \erroronpage{210}{Abs.6, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} Fehlendes Komma: "`abliest), kann man"' \erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ -1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} kann es angebracht sein, ihn + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} kann es angebracht sein, ihn einzubeziehen."' \erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\-1}{FMi}{2006/09/25}{2} @@ -692,30 +692,30 @@ einzubeziehen."' Es sollte wohl "`die ein\u{e} oder andere Einstellung"' hei"sen. \erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 6}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} ist es jedoch besser, + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} ist es jedoch besser, \texttt{ignorehead} \dots{} zu verwenden."' % Über das nächste Infinitivproblem kann man sich durchaus streiten: \erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} liegt es beim Anwender, + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} liegt es beim Anwender, sicherzustellen, dass \dots{}"' \erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`Da diese Option Fonts skaliert, anstatt + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`Da diese Option Fonts skaliert, anstatt Originalfonts \dots{} einzusetzen, \dots{}"' \erroronpage{219}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -4ff}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge "`werden"' ein und streiche Komma vor dem letzten Abschnitt -der Aufz\"{a}hlung: "`Zun\"{a}chst wird das Paket geladen, alle -R\"{a}nder \u{werden} auf einen Zoll gesetzt\_ und die Kolumnentitel \dots{} + F\"{u}ge "`werden"' ein und streiche Komma vor dem letzten Abschnitt +der Aufz\"{a}hlung: "`Zun\"{a}chst wird das Paket geladen, alle +R\"{a}nder \u{werden} auf einen Zoll gesetzt\_ und die Kolumnentitel \dots{} festgelegt; \dots{}"' \erroronpage{220}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma zwischen den Haupts\"{a}tzen ein: "`\dots{} des + F\"{u}ge Komma zwischen den Haupts\"{a}tzen ein: "`\dots{} des Paketes wieder her, und bei \verb"pass" wird das Paket deaktiviert."' \erroronpage{221}{Aufz. cam, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} welche die Ma{\ss}e der Nettoseite + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} welche die Ma{\ss}e der Nettoseite anzeigen, ohne sie zu ber\"{u}hren (\dots{})."' \erroronpage{221}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2006/09/09}{2} @@ -727,23 +727,23 @@ anzeigen, ohne sie zu ber\"{u}hren (\dots{})."' \textsf{crop} erst \dots{} geladen werden sollte."' \erroronpage{221}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} normalerweise ist es n\"{u}tzlich, ihn + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} normalerweise ist es n\"{u}tzlich, ihn beizubehalten."' \erroronpage{222}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} - F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} versucht das Paket, den Druckertreiber + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} versucht das Paket, den Druckertreiber \dots{} zu bestimmen."' \erroronpage{223}{4.3, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} sammelt genug Material, um gut eine Seite + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} sammelt genug Material, um gut eine Seite \dots{}"' \erroronpage{224}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} entspricht dem Inhalt von \verb"\thepage", + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} entspricht dem Inhalt von \verb"\thepage", wie er auf der \dots{}"' \erroronpage{225}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} mithilfe von \verb"\AtEndDocument", um + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} mithilfe von \verb"\AtEndDocument", um sicherzugehen, dass \dots{}"' \erroronpage{229}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 8,10,-1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} @@ -755,11 +755,11 @@ sicherzugehen, dass \dots{}"' \erroronpage{233}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} um Längenparameter, sondern um Befehle + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} um Längenparameter, sondern um Befehle \dots{}"' \erroronpage{234}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Ersetze Semikolon durch Komma und füge Wort ein: "Der Seitentyp wird mit `\dots{} + Ersetze Semikolon durch Komma und füge Wort ein: "Der Seitentyp wird mit `\dots{} ausgewählt\u, der Bereich \u{dagegen} mit \dots{}"' @@ -768,11 +768,11 @@ ausgewählt\u, der Bereich \u{dagegen} mit \dots{}"' \erroronpage{247}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} dass sie fähig sein müssen, innerhalb des + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} dass sie fähig sein müssen, innerhalb des Textes \dots{}"' \erroronpage{249}{Abs.3 in 5.1.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} -Dieser Satz steht schon am Ende des ersten Absatzes dieses +Dieser Satz steht schon am Ende des ersten Absatzes dieses Abschnitts. \erroronpage{251}{Abs.\ -1}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2} @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ Abschnitts. % -check \erroronpage{252}{Tabelle 5.2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} - Ersetze alle amerikanischen Auslassungszeichen \{..\} durch deutsche + Ersetze alle amerikanischen Auslassungszeichen \{..\} durch deutsche \{\dots{}\}. \erroronpage{253}{Z. -2}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Kein Komma vor "`erzeugt wurden"' Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} üblicher, Farben \dots{} einzusetzen"' \erroronpage{269}{Abs.5, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} -\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Standar-dumgebung. \> Standard-umgebung +\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Standar-dumgebung. \> Standard-umgebung \erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} Ersetze Anfang durch: "`Eine der Schwierigkeiten, \LaTeX{}-Tabellen mit außergewöhnlich @@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ großen Einträgen zu setzen, ist eine gute Raumverteilung um diese Einträge he \dots"' \erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} optionales Argument, ähnlich dem von + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} optionales Argument, ähnlich dem von \verb"\\"\u, erweitert."' \erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} @@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ to the ISO rules; $e$ is the charge of the electron. Es muss "`in den Abschnitte\u{n} 6.2.1 bzw. 6.2.2"' hei\ss{}en. \erroronpage{304}{Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} -Es muss "`{}"uber ein zus"atzliche\u{s} obligatorisches Argument"' +Es muss "`{}"uber ein zus"atzliche\u{s} obligatorisches Argument"' hei\ss{}en. \erroronpage{306}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2} @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ Fehlendes Komma: "`einnimmt, ist der"' \erroronpage{358}{Abs.5, Z.6+7}{JS}{2006/11/08}{2} Ersetze: - "`Die \u{Computer Modern Typewriter und} Computer Modern Sans Fonts + "`Die \u{Computer Modern Typewriter und} Computer Modern Sans Fonts verfügen nicht über \u{breite} sondern nur über breitfette"' \> "`Die Computer Modern Sans Fonts @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Fehlendes Komma: "`einnimmt, ist der"' \erroronpage{361}{Tab 7.4}{AFV}{2008/08/08}{s} Die Tabelle zeigt |\mathtt| als Sans Serif Typewriter Font. Dies ist -normalerweise nicht der Fall -- fast jede \LaTeX{} Installation verwendet +normalerweise nicht der Fall -- fast jede \LaTeX{} Installation verwendet Computer Modern Typewriter. \erroronpage{362}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ Streiche das n aus Name\u{n}. Fehlendes Komma: "`werden, normalerweise ohnehin"' \erroronpage{407}{Bsp. 7-7-21, 7-7-22}{TNdz}{2006/01/20}{2} - Fehlendes Komma: "`\ldots ist ein Blindtext, an dem sich + Fehlendes Komma: "`\ldots ist ein Blindtext, an dem sich verschiedene \ldots"´ \erroronpage{416}{Kapitel 7.8.6, Z.8}{RSi}{2005/12/07}{2} @@ -1027,19 +1027,19 @@ Die "`Tabellen"uberschrift"' ist nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format. Ersetze: "`gültigen US-Praxis"' \> "`vorherrschenden Praxis"' \erroronpage{494}{8.2.12 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} - Füge Kommata ein: "`Die Schwierigkeit\u{,} eine abgesetzte Formel + Füge Kommata ein: "`Die Schwierigkeit\u{,} eine abgesetzte Formel korrekt zu gestalten\u{,} kann \dots{}"' \erroronpage{496}{Abs.2, Z.1/2}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} Trennfehler: Mark-up sieht deutlich besser aus als Mar-kup. \erroronpage{496}{Abs.\ 3 (nach Bsp. 8-2-28), Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} allerdings \emph{nur}\u{,} wenn sie \dots{} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} allerdings \emph{nur}\u{,} wenn sie \dots{} verschoben wurde."' \erroronpage{503}{8.4.4 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} - Lösche Komma (Regel §~72.2 "`gleichrangige Wortgruppen oder Wörter in -Aufzählungen (entweder -- oder)"'): "`\dots{} können entweder \dots{} + Lösche Komma (Regel §~72.2 "`gleichrangige Wortgruppen oder Wörter in +Aufzählungen (entweder -- oder)"'): "`\dots{} können entweder \dots{} positioniert werden\u{ } oder \dots{} rechts der Operatoren."' \erroronpage{504}{Abs.-2,Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Ersetze: "`Bei den \u{Hauptversionen} ($D'$,~$T'$~usw.{})"' \> Streiche ein "`die"'. \erroronpage{518}{8.7.5 Abs.\ 3 , Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} und verhält sich somit\u{,} als wären beide + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} und verhält sich somit\u{,} als wären beide Maße gleich null."' \erroronpage{535}{Abs. 1, Z. 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} @@ -1073,11 +1073,11 @@ Ersetze: "`\ldots{} existierenden, neu belebten Mediävalschriften."' \erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{2} Fehlende Symbole aus amssymb hinzugef"ugt: |\circledR|, |\yen|, - |\checkmark| und |\maltese|. + |\checkmark| und |\maltese|. \erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s} |\dag| und |\ddag| sind |\mathord|s und nicht |\mathbin| wie in Tabelle - 8.13 behauptet. + 8.13 behauptet. \erroronpage{546}{Tab. 8.13}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s} |\dag| und |\ddag| sind keine |\mathbin|s. Sie geh"oren deshalb nicht in @@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ Ersetze: "`\ldots{} existierenden, neu belebten Mediävalschriften."' und |\ddagger|. \erroronpage{552}{8.9.6 Abs.\ 1 , Z.\ 4}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht der Symbolklasse Punctuation\u{,} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht der Symbolklasse Punctuation\u{,} sondern Ordinary \dots{} zugeordnet sind."' \erroronpage{554}{Tab. 8-27}{DIs/FMi}{2006/08/09}{2} @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ Ersetze: "`Unterstützung für den Satz \ldots{}"' Und zudem die Seite eine Zeile zu lang. \erroronpage{560}{Z.\ -5}{RHe/FMi}{2006/09/21}{2} -Ersetze: "`der Übersetzungen \u{für} Texte"' \> +Ersetze: "`der Übersetzungen \u{für} Texte"' \> "`der Übersetzungen generierter Texte"' @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Streiche die beiden letzten Buchstaben von ein\u{en}. Streiche Komma: "Wie der Befehl \verb"\nombre"\_ verfügt er \dots{}"' \erroronpage{590}{Abs.1, Z.5/6}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} -Wenn "`rumakeindex"' getrennt werden muss, sieht "`rumake-index"' deutlich +Wenn "`rumakeindex"' getrennt werden muss, sieht "`rumake-index"' deutlich besser aus. \erroronpage{599}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} @@ -1172,11 +1172,11 @@ Es fehlt "`vtex"' als wichtiger Treiber; andererseits sind einige der aufgelisteten Treiber nur von historischer Bedeutung. \erroronpage{634}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} -Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} reelle Werte haben)\u{,} anstatt nach +Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} reelle Werte haben)\u{,} anstatt nach \dots{}"' \erroronpage{637}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} -Füge Komma ein: "`Lässt \LaTeX{} nach \dots{} suchen\u{,} anstatt nach +Füge Komma ein: "`Lässt \LaTeX{} nach \dots{} suchen\u{,} anstatt nach \dots{}"' \erroronpage{637}{viewport}{BMo/FMi}{2007/10/20}{s} @@ -1203,9 +1203,9 @@ Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von vertikale\u{r}. internal default. \erroronpage{651}{Abs. -1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} -Ersetze: "`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt dem des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes +Ersetze: "`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt dem des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes \dots{}"' - \>"`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt der des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes + \>"`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt der des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes \dots{}"' \erroronpage{652}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{2} @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ Ersetze: BibTexMng \> \textsf{BibTexMng} Streiche das Komma nach \texttt{size}. \erroronpage{821}{Tab.13.4, Z.-4}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} -F"uge ein Leerzeichen nach "`Fachzeitschriften"' ein. Ferner ist die +F"uge ein Leerzeichen nach "`Fachzeitschriften"' ein. Ferner ist die "'Tabellen"uberschrift"' nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format. \erroronpage{828}{Tab. 13.5, Z. 1-2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2} @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten F"uge ein Leerzeichen vor "`hat"' ein. \erroronpage{842}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} -Entweder fehlt hier eine "offnende Klammer -- oder die schlie\ss{}ende ist +Entweder fehlt hier eine "offnende Klammer -- oder die schlie\ss{}ende ist zu viel. @@ -1397,15 +1397,15 @@ Ersetze: "`so wird eine Fehlermeldung ausgegeben."' Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten \erroronpage{888}{fig A.1, l.4}{FMi/JAn}{2005/09/09}{2} - ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' und entferne Komma nach "`Zoll"' + ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' und entferne Komma nach "`Zoll"' \erroronpage{891}{Tab.A.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} F"uge ein Komma vor "`der eine feste oder"' ein. \erroronpage{899}{A.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} - Füge Komma ein: "`Diese Struts sind sehr nützlich, um die Höhe oder + Füge Komma ein: "`Diese Struts sind sehr nützlich, um die Höhe oder \dots{}"' - + \erroronpage{903}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2} Füge Wort ein: "`nach der \u{letzten} Klammer \verb=}= und\ldots"' @@ -1485,7 +1485,7 @@ Ersetze Orleans \> Orl\'{e}ans \CHAPTER{Bibliographie} \erroronpage{1017}{[57]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} -Ersetzte Erl\"auterung durch: "`Die +Ersetzte Erl\"auterung durch: "`Die \u{englische} erste Ausgabe dieses Buches."' \erroronpage{1017/1018}{[58]}{FMi}{2009/08/01}{s} @@ -1502,9 +1502,9 @@ Schreibe "`Sprachengetrennt"' getrennt. Füge ``Lars Hellstr\"om'' als Autor hinzu. Datum ``Dezember 2004'' \erroronpage{1025}{[116, Z.\ 2]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} - Vergleich mit "`(eben)so \dots{} setzen kann, wie sonst \dots{}"' + Vergleich mit "`(eben)so \dots{} setzen kann, wie sonst \dots{}"' erfordert Komma - + \erroronpage{1026}{[127], Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} F"uge ein Komma vor "`welche"' ein. @@ -1559,7 +1559,7 @@ Die Abkürzung NFSS sollte \textsf{NFSS} geschrieben werden. \CHAPTER{Biographien} -\erroronpage{1129}{Abs. 2, Z.3}{SZi}{2005/11/24}{2} +\erroronpage{1129}{Abs. 2, Z.3}{SZi}{2005/11/24}{2} l"osche g aus Dok\u{g}umente \end{erratalist} @@ -1594,7 +1594,7 @@ Die Abkürzung NFSS sollte \textsf{NFSS} geschrieben werden. \contributor{RSi}{Roman Sigg} \contributor{SNe}{Stefan Neuhaus} \contributor{SZi}{Stefan Ziesemer} -\contributor{TNdz}{Timo Niedenzu} +\contributor{TNdz}{Timo Niedenzu} \contributor{VVo}{Vladimir Volovich} \contributor{YiL}{Yiannis Lazarides} \end{multicols} @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ wenn möglich gleich in der für diese Datei benötigte Form, d.h. Hier ist ein Beispiel: \begin{verbatim} \erroronpage{5}{Abs.3, Z.1}{MOs}{2005/09/01}{} - Ersetze: "`LaTeX"' \> "`\LaTeX{}"' + Ersetze: "`LaTeX"' \> "`\LaTeX{}"' \end{verbatim} Die Verwendung von Babelkommandos (etwa |"`|) ist möglich, aber Umlaute sollten möglichst nicht als 8-bit Zeichen eingegeben werden (also besser |"a| diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.pdf Binary files differindex 16117b1868d..15c68a2c720 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lb2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt index 8e7c8f43907..5e20be289d9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ LaTeX Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions - + 31 March 2016 @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified in the file lppl.txt. The latest version of this license is in https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version 2008 or later. The use of LaTeX is unrestricted. @@ -45,4 +45,3 @@ system must be distributed together with them. The list of all derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution and covered by LPPL is given in the file unpacked.txt. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/letter.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/letter.pdf Binary files differindex 619436eb051..f2840343b66 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/letter.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/letter.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.err index 043c56d7528..e9a1de4ea5a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.err +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.err @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ \begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} %% %% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007 Frank Mittelbach -%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; %% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl % % @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ % Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting % % hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for -% errata files of other books. +% errata files of other books. % % Changes: % @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ % some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: -\let\u\underline +\let\u\underline \renewcommand\>{$\to$} %%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ \def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% %%% also count secondary: -%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% } \renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp } - + \renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil \endgobble @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ } \renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% - \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} \end{filecontents} @@ -240,12 +240,12 @@ \begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} % % -% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% Configuration file for the errata listing of % % The LaTeX Graphics Companion, Second Edition % % -% \erratastartdate +% \erratastartdate % % Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. % @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ % listing. % % The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th -% printing are typeset. -% +% printing are typeset. +% % \renewcommand\myprinting{2} @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}. \end{center} Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book. -For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 +For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice will be made between all those with the largest number of findings). @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers). As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or -multiple errors. --- +multiple errors. --- Good luck! \begin{center} @@ -395,9 +395,9 @@ Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential for correctly understanding the book contents. - -\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{} - + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{} + Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book to book depending on how the paper was handled between print @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ There should be a bit more space in front of the code block \seriouserroronpage{152}{exa 4-1-15}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2} Output of example is missing! Oops \ldots\ it was there honest -\erroronpage{177}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{177}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Missing interword space: ``Flowcharts\u{ }are'' \CHAPTER{Chapter 5} @@ -451,11 +451,11 @@ Coding changed to: \end{pspicture} \end{verbatim} -\erroronpage{240}{para 4, l.8}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{240}{para 4, l.8}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Remove backslash in: ``keyword setting \verb/\showpoints=true/'' -\erroronpage{254}{Ex 5-9-1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{} +\erroronpage{254}{Ex 5-9-1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{} The blue circle shouldn't be visible behind the black circle. This is a problem due to the printing process used for the book---it does not show up on all books. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ or curve (path). \CHAPTER{Chapter 6} \erroronpage{335}{para 5, l.4}{JMi}{2008/06/23}{2} -``\ldots{} summarized in \u{Table} 5.2 \ldots" \> ``\ldots{} summarized in +``\ldots{} summarized in \u{Table} 5.2 \ldots" \> ``\ldots{} summarized in \u{Figure} 5.2 \ldots'' \erroronpage{406}{margin}{hv}{2007/08/20}{2} @@ -492,17 +492,17 @@ but not ``Koaungli Un''. Sorry for the mistake. \CHAPTER{Chapter 8} -\erroronpage{514}{tab. 8.3}{FMi}{2008/012/21}{2} +\erroronpage{514}{tab. 8.3}{FMi}{2008/012/21}{2} Slightly increase spacing after hline. -\erroronpage{515}{tab. 8.4}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{515}{tab. 8.4}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} There should be vertical spacing in the first line (superscript $10^{24}$ touches top line) -\seriouserroronpage{579}{para 2, l.3}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\seriouserroronpage{579}{para 2, l.3}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} \verb=\ln= \> \verb=\nl= (this will also change the index entry) -\erroronpage{583}{para 4, l.9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{583}{para 4, l.9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Replace: ``of the voltage $V_C$'' \> ``of the voltage $v_C$'' \CHAPTER{Chapter 9} @@ -528,15 +528,15 @@ release of the package. \erroronpage{720}{6th item}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Replace: ``documentwide'' \> ``\u{D}ocumentwide'' -\erroronpage{726}{para 2, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{726}{para 2, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Extra space after parenthesis: ``( in practice'' -\erroronpage{740}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{740}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Replace: ``given by \textit{start\u{ row}}'' \> ``given by \textit{start} row'' -\seriouserroronpage{741}{Ex 11-3-5}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\seriouserroronpage{741}{Ex 11-3-5}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Usage of \verb=\cellcolor= might introduce extra space in the output (as one can see in the example). @@ -545,11 +545,11 @@ This can be argued as being a bug in the \texttt{colortbl} package. Given that t basic \verb=\color= command ignores spaces after it, \verb=\cellcolor= should behave similarly. -\seriouserroronpage{744}{line after Ex 11-3-9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\seriouserroronpage{744}{line after Ex 11-3-9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Replace: ``This does \u{not}, of course, affect'' \> ``This does, of course, \u{also} affect'' -\erroronpage{758}{para 3, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{758}{para 3, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Add small space between values and units in frame dimension \erroronpage{760}{fig. 11.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} @@ -561,15 +561,15 @@ Frank: because the author of this section used a real live example where he had used an optional argument to |\section| to make the toc have special text for some reason (should be mentioned in the source though). -\erroronpage{774}{2nd snytax box}{hv}{2009/05/8}{2} +\erroronpage{774}{2nd snytax box}{hv}{2009/05/8}{2} The |\transduration| command takes ``time in seconds'' as mandatory argument (and not ``key/vals'') -\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} ``in not shown''\> ``\u{is} not shown'' -\erroronpage{794}{exa 11--4-36}{hv}{2009/05/12}{2} +\erroronpage{794}{exa 11--4-36}{hv}{2009/05/12}{2} Replace ``pic2e'' \> ``pic\u{t}2e'' in output, corresponding input not displayed in the book. @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ the fonts. \CHAPTER{Bibliography} -\erroronpage{822}{entry [32]}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +\erroronpage{822}{entry [32]}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science'' \erroronpage{823}{entry [35]}{JPFD}{2007/09/05}{2} @@ -602,27 +602,27 @@ Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science'' An updated version of the manual can be downloaded from \url{https://www.tug.org/docs/metapost/mpman.pdf} -\erroronpage{825}{entry [50]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +\erroronpage{825}{entry [50]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science'' -\erroronpage{826}{entry [59]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +\erroronpage{826}{entry [59]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_1.pdf} -\erroronpage{826}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +\erroronpage{826}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_2.pdf} - \erroronpage{828}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + \erroronpage{828}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Add web url: ``Sample chapter at: \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}'' - \erroronpage{829/830}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + \erroronpage{829/830}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Page breaks changed due to other changes -\erroronpage{833}{entry [128]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +\erroronpage{833}{entry [128]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Url changed to: \url{obsolete/graphics/pstricks/doc/code/pst-code.pdf} -\erroronpage{833}{entry [129]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +\erroronpage{833}{entry [129]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} Url changed to: \url{macros/generic/multido/} @@ -632,16 +632,16 @@ An ``s'' is missing in ``using'' (end of the first line of comment) \CHAPTER{Index} - \erroronpage{856/860/866}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + \erroronpage{856/860/866}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} changed index entries due to changes above \erroronpage{886}{col.2, l.-7}{GTa}{2010/02/10}{} image(METAPOST) should also reference example on p.145 - \erroronpage{891}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + \erroronpage{891}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} changed index entries due to changes above - \erroronpage{910/911}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + \erroronpage{910/911}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} changed index entries due to changes above \erroronpage{925}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} @@ -671,8 +671,8 @@ An ``s'' is missing in ``using'' (end of the first line of comment) Other people have sent us corrections for errors already found. Thanks to all of you! -If you find -further +If you find +further errors please report them to one of the authors, e.g., \begin{quote}\ttfamily frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.pdf Binary files differindex b2275f085aa..d9d9a964d4e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lgc2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt index 9425aab83cd..8b7b369ce2a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ LaTeX Project Public License ============================ - + LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01 Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Preamble The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use -this licence for any software that you wish to distribute. +this licence for any software that you wish to distribute. It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ A typical example would be Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would apply, with: -`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and +`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and `The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ copyright notice for the base latex distribution. This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on -distribution other than those specified below. +distribution other than those specified below. This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is -distributed under the LPPL. +distributed under the LPPL. @@ -109,14 +109,14 @@ under the following restrictions: * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not expressly forbid it. See note below, under "Conditions on individual files". - + * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used by the original files in the distribution of The Program. - * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly + * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly indicate that the file is not part of the standard system. * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ under the following restrictions: addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the - changed files. + changed files. * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version in the modified file. @@ -142,23 +142,23 @@ under the following restrictions: then files with the following file extensions which have special meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the license: - + - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices that are placed in the generated files. - + - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not allowed to be distributed in place of original files. - + - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate such files. - + The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex -in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt index 09cfcc9dd44..a00b13dfa67 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of -The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. @@ -65,32 +65,32 @@ following eight conditions are met: distribution of a modified version of the file as described below in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program'. - + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified version of the file that are described below in the subsection `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. - + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the original file. - + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program which contains it. - + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. - + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified files. - + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived from the modified file with the filename of the original file. - + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ following eight conditions are met: (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) - for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of The Program free of charge (either the version from which your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. - + A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution ----------------------------------------------------- @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since these are installation files containing the legal notices that are placed in the files they generate. - + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands that are allowed in a particular configuration file. - + Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Here is an example of such a notice and statement: % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - % and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 1999/06/01 or later. % % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Important Recommendations to comprise The Program. Noting Exceptional Files - + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX @@ -309,6 +309,6 @@ Important Recommendations modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The - additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional conditions. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt index afee9416afa..4295a097ee1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of -The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. @@ -65,32 +65,32 @@ following eight conditions are met: distribution of a modified version of the file as described below in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program'. - + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified version of the file that are described below in the subsection `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. - + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the original file. - + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program which contains it. - + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. - + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified files. - + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived from the modified file with the filename of the original file. - + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ following eight conditions are met: (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) - for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of The Program free of charge (either the version from which your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. - + A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution ----------------------------------------------------- @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since these are installation files containing the legal notices that are placed in the files they generate. - + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands that are allowed in a particular configuration file. - + Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Here is an example of such a notice and statement: % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - % and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 1999/12/01 or later. % % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Important Recommendations to comprise The Program. Noting Exceptional Files - + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX @@ -310,9 +310,6 @@ Important Recommendations modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The - additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional conditions. - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt index e8ad0953dc5..cd58edfc22f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt @@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly -suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but -it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is +suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but +it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', @@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ In this license document the following terms are used: `Work' Any work being distributed under this License. - + `Derived Work' Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. - `Modification' + `Modification' Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable law -- for example, the production of a file containing an original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ In this license document the following terms are used: `Modify' To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable law. - + `Distribution' Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) @@ -79,16 +79,16 @@ In this license document the following terms are used: no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under any applicable law. - `Base Interpreter' + `Base Interpreter' A program or process that is normally needed for running or - interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a - `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the + `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'. @@ -129,8 +129,8 @@ the Derived Work. distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only -the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption -to a component of the Work. +the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption +to a component of the Work. a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement for a component of the Work when that component is used with the @@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ to a component of the Work. clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version of this component to the user when used interactively with that Base Interpreter. - + b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log of the changes. - + c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ to a component of the Work. d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: - 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; + 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; if your distribution of a modified component is made by offering access to copy the modified component from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy @@ -183,15 +183,15 @@ format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of applying that process. - + 10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. - + b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of - itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the + itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. 11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ the Work through the following steps: a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer to update their communication data within one month. - + b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce within the pertinent community your intention to take over @@ -270,17 +270,17 @@ the Work through the following steps: 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. - + b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, - then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. - + then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. + 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above and after three months your intention is challenged neither by the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. - + 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes reachable once more within three months of a change completed under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ Here is an example of such a notice and statement: % version 2005/12/01 or later. % % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. - % + % % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. % % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and `Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your -Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. +Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it @@ -407,10 +407,9 @@ Important Recommendations using a line such as: % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. - + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise the Work. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf Binary files differindex 979e7c4fa8a..2e3231a0067 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.pdf Binary files differindex 9113b5ae4ce..3d841df2664 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.tex index 3b351448b71..13e283c535d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews.tex @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % % Copyright 2006, 2009, 2011, 2014 Heiko Oberdiek -% Copyright (C) 2014-2019 The LaTeX3 Project -% +% Copyright (C) 2014-2020 The LaTeX3 Project +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- % @@ -28,12 +28,16 @@ % * LaTeX Project version % 2015/02/16 v1.4b: % * Fix TOC issue +% 2020/01/30 v1.4b: +% * Fix TOC issue more generally and add page numbers % \fi \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesFile{ltnews.tex}% - [2015/02/16 v1.4b Master file for ltnews*.tex (LaTeX Project)] -\providecommand*{\lastissue}{30} + [2020/01/30 v1.4c Master file for ltnews*.tex (LaTeX Project)] + +\providecommand*{\lastissue}{31} + \InputIfFileExists{ltnews-lastissue.cfg}{}{} @@ -81,6 +85,7 @@ \RequirePackage{hyperref} \hypersetup{colorlinks} \RequirePackage{bookmark} +\RequirePackage{multicol} \makeatletter @@ -90,6 +95,16 @@ \number\value{issue}% } + +% show the page number on first page of issues: + +\renewcommand{\ps@titlepage}{% + \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{\hfill}% + \renewcommand{\@evenhead}{\hfill}% + \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{\@indiciafont\@indicia\hfill --\thepage}% + \renewcommand{\@evenfoot}{\@indiciafont\@indicia\hfill --\thepage}% +} + \newcommand*{\MonthJanuary}{01} \newcommand*{\MonthFebruary}{02} \newcommand*{\MonthMarch}{03} @@ -156,6 +171,7 @@ \makeatother + \begin{document} %%% Title and Table of Contents @@ -187,7 +203,11 @@ \def\y{|graphicx}% \ifx\x\y \else - \@latex@error{ltnews.tex: \string\usepackage[#1]{#2} found}\@ehc + \def\y{|multicol}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \@latex@error{ltnews.tex: \string\usepackage[#1]{#2} found}\@ehc + \fi \fi \fi \fi @@ -201,6 +221,8 @@ }% \newcommand*{\gobbleopt}[1][]{}% \let\org@twocolumn\twocolumn + \renewcommand\NeedsTeXFormat[1]{\NeedsTeXFormatdate}% ignore that inside + \newcommand\NeedsTeXFormatdate[1][]{}% % inidividual issues \renewenvironment{document}{% \clearpage \ifnum\@issue=20 % @@ -215,7 +237,7 @@ \let\protect\l@paragraph\protect\l@subsection }% \fi - \ifnum\@issue=\lastissue\space + \ifnum\@issue >20\space \addtocontents{toc}{% \let\protect\l@paragraph\protect\saved@l@paragraph }% @@ -224,7 +246,7 @@ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}}% \renewcommand*{\tableofcontents}{% \section*{\contentsname}% - \@starttoc{toc\lastissue}% + \@starttoc{toc\theissue}% }% \let\saved@addtocontents\addtocontents \renewcommand*{\addtocontents}[2]{% @@ -232,7 +254,7 @@ \def\temp@toc{toc}% \def\temp@param{##1}% \ifx\temp@toc\temp@param - \saved@addtocontents{toc\lastissue}{##2}% + \saved@addtocontents{toc\theissue}{##2}% \fi }% \let\l@subsubsection\l@subsection diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf Binary files differindex e67f48038b4..07004e60288 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex index 9df213931ff..c5d66f003ed 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex @@ -1,63 +1,63 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews01.tex - + % This is issue 1 of LaTeX News. \documentclass % [type1fonts] {ltnews} - + \publicationmonth{June} \publicationyear{1994} \publicationissue{1} - + \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews} - -An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of -\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug + +An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of +\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news. - + \section{\LaTeXe---the new \LaTeX{} release} - + The most important news is the release of \LaTeXe, the new version of the \LaTeX{} software. This version has better support for fonts, graphics and colour, and will be actively maintained by the \LaTeX3 -project team. Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and +project team. Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and December. - + \section{Why a new \LaTeX?} - + Over the years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This is, of course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had one unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ different sites. Thus, to process documents from various places, a site maintainer was forced to keep \LaTeX{} (with and without \NFSS), \SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, and so on. In addition, when looking at a source file it was not always clear for which format the document was written. - + To put an end to this unsatisfactory situation a new release of \LaTeX{} was produced. It brings all such extensions back under a single format and thus @@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of \LaTeX~2.09. The new release was available for several months as a test version, and the final release of 1~June officially replaces the old version. - + \section{Processing documents with \LaTeXe} - + Documents written for \LaTeX~2.09 will still be read by \LaTeXe. Any such document is run in \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. - -Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run -up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did. If you want to run your document + +Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run +up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did. If you want to run your document in the faster \emph{native mode}, you should try replacing the line: \begin{verbatim} \documentstyle[<options>,<packages>]{<class>} @@ -91,17 +91,17 @@ with: \documentclass[<options>]{<class>} \usepackage{latexsym,<packages>} \end{verbatim} -Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09 -packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode. You should find +Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09 +packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode. You should find out if there is a \LaTeXe{} version of the package available. - -\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe, + +\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe, described in \emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors}. - + \section{New packages} - -\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and -multi-lingual typesetting. The following software should be available + +\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and +multi-lingual typesetting. The following software should be available from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe: \begin{citations} @@ -112,12 +112,12 @@ from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe: \item[psnfss] for using Type~1 fonts. \item[tools] other packages by the \LaTeX3 team. \end{citations} -The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in -\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or +The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in +\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}. - + \section{Further information} - + More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in: \begin{citations} @@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in: \item[The \LaTeX{} Companion] Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, \AW, 1994. \end{citations} -The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of +The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of \LaTeX: \begin{citations} -\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] +\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents, in the file \verb|usrguide.tex|. \item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers] @@ -141,12 +141,9 @@ The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of class and package writers, in the file \verb|fntguide.tex|. \end{citations} -For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local -\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, -P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, +For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, +P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, EMail:~tug@tug.org. - -\end{document} - - +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf Binary files differindex 69850480778..61645a25487 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex index ee386cb2e04..b0e3d15be86 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews02.tex @@ -99,28 +99,28 @@ be upwardly compatible with the test version. information structure and superior printed output for mathematical documents. - There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here. + There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here. AMS-\LaTeX{} is described in the accompanying documentation, and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}. Version 1.2beta of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released for testing by intrepid - users in October 1994. The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected + users in October 1994. The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected in early January 1995. - + It will be divided into two bundles: \begin{itemize} - + \item the \verb|amsfonts| packages, which give access to hundreds of new mathematical symbols, and new math fonts such as blackboard bold and fraktur. - - \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over + + \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over mathematical typesetting, such as multi-line subscripts, - enhanced theorem and proof environments, - and improved displayed equations, - + enhanced theorem and proof environments, + and improved displayed equations, + \end{itemize} - For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be + For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be provided. \section{\LaTeX{} on the internet} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf Binary files differindex 4fe2017196c..f8b9aadd41a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex index 8784c3b8e0b..0496843f0d7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews03.tex @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ June. In the last \emph{\LaTeXNews}, we said ``we don't expect so much activity in the next six months,'' which has turned out not to be -true! +true! \section{Additional input encodings} @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ One topic of discussion that has kept us busy is the distribution and modification conditions of \LaTeX. We are committed to keeping \LaTeX{} as free reliable software, and ensuring that (as far as possible) \LaTeX{} documents will produce the same results on all -systems. +systems. The modification conditions are currently under discussion, and we would like to hear from anyone interested. Please read diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf Binary files differindex 17521c4ad2a..53f6d6a0a77 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex index b42e10da578..d64d4cb7484 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews04.tex @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This release of the dc fonts fixes many bugs (including the missing many other ways. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade as soon as possible if currently you are using the old dc fonts, release 1.1 or earlier. The new fonts are available from the CTAN archives, in -\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}. +\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}. The names of the font files are \emph{different}. This does not affect \LaTeX\ documents but \emph{does} affect the installation procedure as @@ -123,18 +123,18 @@ of input of accented and other characters. Three new input encodings are now supported. \begin{itemize} -\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding, +\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding, as used in Microsoft Windows 3.x. \item \texttt{cp437de} a variant of \texttt{cp437}, which uses \ss\ rather than $\beta$ in the appropriate slot. -\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers. +\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers. \end{itemize} \section{Further information} For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, -1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA, +1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA, Fax:~+1~415~982~8559, EMail:~tug@tug.org. The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/| diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf Binary files differindex 2080d044dea..9269f1f2353 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex index dfa9e23d780..07b95287ef4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews05.tex @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Most \LaTeX\ sectioning commands are defined using For example, the \textsf{article} class defines: \begin{small} \begin{verbatim} -\newcommand\section{\@startsection +\newcommand\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}% {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}} \end{verbatim} @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ For example, one could use the \verb|\MakeUppercase| command to produce uppercase headings. A package or class file could contain: \begin{small} \begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand\section{\@startsection +\renewcommand\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}% {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\MakeUppercase}} \end{verbatim} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf Binary files differindex 5819a7f5064..3dd686d975f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex index 250675ea2e1..c296040047c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews06.tex @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ such as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} and \texttt{T1enc.def}. These file names cause problems on some systems (in particular they are illegal on the ISO 9660 CDROM format) and so in this release -all file names have been made lowercase (for example +all file names have been made lowercase (for example \texttt{t1cmr.fd} and \texttt{t1enc.def}). This change should \emph{not} affect any document. Within \LaTeX, @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ should still work with this new release. The change \emph{does} affect the configuration files that may be used to make the \LaTeX\ format with initex. For example, the file \texttt{fonttext.ltx} previously specified \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|. -It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|. +It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|. If you use a local file \texttt{fonttext.cfg} you will need to make similar changes, as \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}| will not work as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} is no longer in the distribution. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here: \end{verbatim} \section{Docstrip improvements} -The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\ +The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\ sources has undergone further development. The new version should be able to process all old `batchfiles' but it allows a simpler syntax in new `batchfiles' (no need to define \verb|\def\batchfile{|\ldots). @@ -146,4 +146,3 @@ font set. \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf Binary files differindex 098df2c6cd7..0eec4615e12 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex index 6c08629d676..020e8bd8a6a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews07.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf Binary files differindex 7e489ab52f3..328aa785797 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex index 891d13b302e..ab9d26d48b0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews08.tex @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ some of the internal names for the characters have changed. These additions to the \textsf{inputenc} package are \texttt{decmulti} (the DEC Multinational -Character Set, contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire) +Character Set, contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire) and \texttt{cp1250} (an MS-Windows encoding for Central and Eastern Europe, contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski). There is also a \texttt{cp1252} encoding that is identical to \texttt{ansinew}. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ of syntax conventions and basic data-types that might form the basis for programming large scale projects in \TeX. They will be located in\\ this CTAN directory: -\begin{verbatim} +\begin{verbatim} CTAN:macros/latex/packages/expl3 \end{verbatim} The documentation of this material is as follows: individual package @@ -151,4 +151,3 @@ the following one line message: % information on how to subscribe to \texttt{LaTeX-L}. \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf Binary files differindex 089ab8026c9..f5a44502594 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex index 61cb8ced9c2..f0b396586f9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews09.tex @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ \section{New math font encodings} A joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 -Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}. +Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}. It is designed to overcome several limitations and implementation problems of the old math font encodings and to simplify switching between different sets of math fonts, much as the \LaTeX{} font @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ integrate it into the main \LaTeX{} distribution for the next release. Documents using only standard \LaTeX{} commands for math symbols -should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings +should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings However, documents, classes or packages making specific assumptions about the encoding of math symbol fonts are likely to break. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ the World Wide Web at \texttt{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}. \section{A new math accent} A new math accent, \verb|\mathring|, has been added. This is a math mode -version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text +version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text mode with the command \verb|\r|. \section{Extended \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}} @@ -111,19 +111,19 @@ environment and the \verb|\rule| command. For many other standard \section{Support for Cyrillic encodings} - + We are very pleased that, after a lengthy period of development, a set of fonts, encodings and support files for using \LaTeX\ with Cyrillic characters will soon be available. - + Test versions of the `LH' fonts for these Cyrillic encodings, based on the Computer Modern design, are available from CTAN archives in the directory \texttt{fonts/cyrillic/lh-test}. The \LaTeX\ support files (by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich) are also available from CTAN archives in\\ \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2} - - + + \section{Default docstrip header} Many \LaTeX\ users now distribute packages in documented source form diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf Binary files differindex 8ec66dea8d4..83586671715 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex index 3214260a6a4..02ba863a381 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews10.tex 12/01/1998 @@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ quote (somewhat censored to protect the guilty) well reflects some of our feelings about working on \LaTeX{} over the years: \textit{the mere existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}. - + \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} distribution} - + Since the (once) `new' standard \LaTeX{} has reached such a venerable age, we are reviewing the way in which the system is presented to the world. - + An early intention is to define, given the wide variety of good packages now available, what now constitutes a useful installation of \LaTeX{}. We also hope that such a definition will help document @@ -75,14 +75,14 @@ existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}. designer can reasonably assume that a known list of facilities will be there for all users (so that each class need not supply them). - + As a first small step towards this definition, we shall replace the \texttt{latex/packages} subdirectory on \ctan{}. This directory was a curious mixture of the important, such as the \LaTeX{} \texttt{tools}, that any self-respecting \LaTeX{} installation ought to have, and the esoteric or experimental. - The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to + The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to new locations, as follows: \begin{quote} \texttt{expl3} to \texttt{latex/exptl/project}\\ @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}. \section{\LaTeX\ Project on the Internet} A new \texttt{latex-project.org} domain has been registered. -The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from +The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from \ctan\ are available at \texttt{http://www.latex-project.org/} and the \LaTeX\ bug reporting address has been changed to \texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ including commonly used variants and Mongolian Cyrillic encodings). This provides platform independent and sophisticated basic support for high-quality typesetting in various Cyrillic-based languages. - + For further information see the file \texttt{cyrguide.tex}. \section{Tools distribution} @@ -150,4 +150,3 @@ private extensions, are described in the accompanying documentation. \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf Binary files differindex 9d2cac027cf..039554c1a6c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex index e39ff4cc865..40c1c120afc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews11.tex 01/06/1999 % This is issue 11 of LaTeX News. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ loaded, and with which options, do not work for the \pkg{fontenc} package. \section{New math font encodings} - + As we announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, a joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 Project has developed a new \mbox{8-bit} math font encoding for \TeX{}. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf Binary files differindex 6b8bf02f34c..51b1cc7b84c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex index ede8bb5362f..5bf095b4aa7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex @@ -1,32 +1,32 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi -% Filename: ltnews12.tex +% Filename: ltnews12.tex % % This is issue 12 of LaTeX News. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ on the list \texttt{LATEX-L}. You can join this list, which is intended solely for discussing ideas and concepts for future versions of \LaTeX, by sending mail to %\begin{quote} - \email{listserv@URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE} + \email{listserv@URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE} %\end{quote} containing the line \begin{quote} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf Binary files differindex 7321120fedb..2db447027e8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex index 65e09b9871a..f9241ead816 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex @@ -1,32 +1,32 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi -% Filename: ltnews13.tex +% Filename: ltnews13.tex % % This is issue 13 of LaTeX News. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ % \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationmonth{June} \publicationyear{2000} \publicationissue{13} @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \maketitle -\raisefirstsection +\raisefirstsection \section{Yearly release cycle} We announced in \textit{\LaTeX{} News~11} that we intended to switch @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ to release patches as needed to fix significant bugs. \end{quote} \begin{latexonly} - \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \vspace{-\baselineskip} \end{latexonly} \noindent @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ and the distribution has been `cleaned up'. The file The documentation (in \file{psnfss2e.pdf}) has been completely rewritten to provide a comprehensive introduction to the use -of PostScript fonts. +of PostScript fonts. Notice that the new \PSNFSS{} needs updated files for font metrics, virtual fonts and font definitions. If you received the new @@ -163,16 +163,16 @@ these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\} for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}! -A paper describing the new output routine is +A paper describing the new output routine is \begin{latexonly} at\\ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf% \hspace*{-16pt}}\\ \end{latexonly} \begin{htmlonly} - at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. \end{htmlonly} -All code examples and documentation are available +All code examples and documentation are available \begin{latexonly} at\\ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/% @@ -197,5 +197,3 @@ This directory has been extended to contain \end{description} \end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf Binary files differindex 1e46481d536..24239c2bb73 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex index 0444d75689c..22df643f751 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex @@ -1,33 +1,33 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi -% Filename: ltnews14.tex -% +% Filename: ltnews14.tex +% % This is issue 14 of LaTeX News. \documentclass @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ % \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationmonth{June} \publicationyear{2001} \publicationissue{14} @@ -128,10 +128,10 @@ page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\} for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}! More recently we have added material to handle the complex front -matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at +matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at Gutenberg\,2001 in Metz. -A paper describing the new output routine is +A paper describing the new output routine is \begin{latexonly} at\\ \begin{small} @@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ A paper describing the new output routine is \end{small} \end{latexonly} \begin{htmlonly} - at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. \end{htmlonly} -All code examples and documentation are available +All code examples and documentation are available \begin{latexonly} at\\ \begin{small} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf Binary files differindex af708c6e48b..d250b2b2ae6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex index 9c2d393c6bf..cbf8f8840b5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex @@ -1,33 +1,33 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi -% Filename: ltnews15.tex -% +% Filename: ltnews15.tex +% % This is issue 15 of LaTeX News. \documentclass @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ % \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationmonth{December} \publicationyear{2003} \publicationissue{15} @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Jeff Licquia and Branden Robinson. The English has been corrected in \verb|\reftextbefore| (an incompatible change). There are other extensions -such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|. +such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|. Some Dutch text has also been changed and two\newline new options added: \package{slovak} and \package{slovene}. @@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ A number of options have been added to the \package{textcomp} package, enabling only available glyphs to be used. Also, the `NFSS font families' are now divided into five different groups according to the subset of glyphs each provides from the full -collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding. -Given sufficient information about a font family +collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding. +Given sufficient information about a font family \package{textcomp} will use this in order to limit the\newline typesetting to those glyphs that are available. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ tables in batch mode by providing a suitable input file. \section{New input encodings} -The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows: +The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows: \package{macce} input encoding (Apple Central European), thanks to Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski; \package{cp1257}\newline @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ of standard \LaTeX{} Latin encodings. \section{And finally \ldots\ pict2e} -The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed +The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed as there is now a fully working version from Hubert G\"a{\ss}lein and Rolf Niepraschk. It is described in \textit{The \LaTeX{} Manual}. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf Binary files differindex 25c6c48458f..7e9d1eab75b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex index 96ca1ddf683..75ee38c8150 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex @@ -1,33 +1,33 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi -% Filename: ltnews16.tex -% +% Filename: ltnews16.tex +% % This is issue 16 of LaTeX News. \documentclass @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ % \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationmonth{December} \publicationyear{2003} \publicationissue{16} @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ \section{Anniversary news} This anniversary \textit{Issue~16} takes a brief look into the future work of -the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and and longer range. Please let +the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and longer range. Please let us know if you want %\newline to get involved with us in any of this work (see below). @@ -72,16 +72,16 @@ and intellectual) by using it to discover masses of invaluable `insider information' about: \begin{itemize} \item the latest release of Standard \LaTeX{}; -\item over~200~extension packages; +\item over~200~extension packages; \item plus related software and systems. \end{itemize} For more information on this all new (??\ldots OK,\newline not \emph{all}, but over 90\%!!), all accurate (we hope!)\newline -10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline +10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline \mbox{\url{http://www.awprofessional.com/titles/0201362996}}. - - + + \section{Future maintenance} We are currently exploring how best to support the very large and @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ in getting involved. \section{LPPL certification} There are still some outstanding diplomatic tasks around the -\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include +\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include e.g.,~getting it `OSF certified' and ensuring that it gains more support and wider use, even in the FSF world\newline where it has long been tolerated. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ making a definite announcement yet. Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features, we certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you -need to debug macros. +need to debug macros. \section{End of `autoload' support} @@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ These can be found at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/} and \mbox{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}}. -Since then a very large proportion of the The Team's efforts have been +Since then a very large proportion of The Team's efforts have been diverted to provide the core author team for TLC2, which provides over 1000 pages of carefully researched and tested documentation of -many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that +many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that was developed over that same time period and that continues to grow and improve prodigiously. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf Binary files differindex f88fd607d06..3327978b660 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.tex index f55300f4479..9abe4053e75 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews17.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews17.tex % @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ that. Note also that \package{fixltx2e} will make use of the facilities in \eTeX{} whenever these are present (see below). The \package{calc} package has also been given an update with a few -extra commands. +extra commands. The commands \verb|\maxof| and \verb|\minof|, each with two brace-delimited arguments, provide the usual numeric $\max$ and $\min$ operations. The commands \verb|\settototalheight| and @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ operations. The commands \verb|\settototalheight| and \verb|\ifcase|. The \package{varioref} package has acquired a few more default -strings but there are still a number of languages for +strings but there are still a number of languages for which good strings are still missing. The \package{showkeys} package has also been updated slightly to work @@ -140,21 +140,21 @@ command \verb|\textsubscript| has been added as a complement to the command \verb|\textsuperscript| in the kernel. Secondly, a new form of \verb|\DeclareMathSizes| that allows all of its arguments to have a dimension suffix. This means you can now use expressions such as -\verb|\DeclareMathSizes{9.5dd}{9.5dd}{7.4dd}{6.6dd}|. +\verb|\DeclareMathSizes{9.5dd}{9.5dd}{7.4dd}{6.6dd}|. The third new addition is the robust command \verb|\TextOrMath| which takes two arguments and executes one of them when typesetting in text or math mode respectively. This command also takes advantage of \eTeX{} -extensions if available; more specifically, +extensions if available; more specifically, %% %%\pagebreak %% when the \eTeX{} extensions are available, it does not -destroy kerning between previous letters and the text to be typeset. +destroy kerning between previous letters and the text to be typeset. The command is also used internally in \package{fixltx2e} to resolve a problem with -\verb|\fnsymbol|. +\verb|\fnsymbol|. Also, further work has been done on reimplementing the command \verb|\addpenalty|, which is used internally in several @@ -166,23 +166,23 @@ The \package{graphics} bundle now supports the \package{dvipdfmx} post-processor and Jonathan Kew's XE\TeX\ program. By support we mean that the graphics packages recognize the new options \texttt{xetex} and \texttt{dvipdfmx} but we do not -distribute the respective driver files. +distribute the respective driver files. -This leads elegantly to a description of the +This leads elegantly to a description of the new policy concerning such driver files in the \package{graphics} bundle. Most driver files for our graphics packages are maintained by the -developers of the associated post-processor or \TeX\ programs. +developers of the associated post-processor or \TeX\ programs. The teams developing these packages are working very hard: their rapid development offers a stark contrast to the current schedule of \LaTeX\ releases. It is therefore no longer practical for the \LaTeX\ Team to be responsible for distributing the -latest versions of these driver files. +latest versions of these driver files. Therefore the installation files for \package{graphics} have been split: there is now \file{graphics.ins} to install the package files and \file{graphics-drivers.ins} for the driver files (located in -\file{drivers.dtx}). -There is no need +\file{drivers.dtx}). +There is no need to install all those provided in the file \file{drivers.dtx}. Please also note that, as requested by the maintainers of @@ -203,28 +203,27 @@ programming environment. These packages have been lying dormant for some time while the \LaTeX\ Project Team were preoccupied by other things such as developing the experimental packages \package{xor}, \package{template}, etc., (and also writing that indispensable -and encyclopaedic volume,\\ +and encyclopaedic volume,\\ The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition). In October 2004 work on this code base was resumed with the goal of some day turning it into a kernel for \LaTeX3. This work can now also make full use of the widely accepted \eTeX\ extensions. Currently -two areas are central to this work. +two areas are central to this work. -\begin{itemize} +\begin{itemize} \item Extending the - kernel code of \LaTeX3. + kernel code of \LaTeX3. \item Converting the experimental packages such as \package{xor}, \package{template} to use the new - syntax internally. -\end{itemize} + syntax internally. +\end{itemize} Beware! Development of \package{expl3} is happening so fast that the descriptions above might be out of date when you read this! If you wish to see what's going on then go to \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code.html} where you can download - fully working code (we hope!). + fully working code (we hope!). \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf Binary files differindex 6e3397ff349..66a65018e93 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.tex index 33f0d7310dc..3a99f8501b3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews18.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: ltnews18.tex % @@ -48,4 +48,3 @@ \noindent This news never existed. \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf Binary files differindex 7cfdb4dd3ea..490ac3a5cd1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.tex index af99d329dd2..a6f1fa9512c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews19.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf Binary files differindex 31a0b0cf517..5200799f506 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf Binary files differindex 26bd969befe..56f053a0892 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.tex index f9416b58e18..d94df28b480 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews21.tex @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ % This is issue 21 of LaTeX News. \documentclass{ltnews} -\def\ConTeXt{C\kern-.0333emon\-\kern-.0667em\TeX\kern-.0333emt} +\def\ConTeXt{C\kern-.0333emon\-\kern-.0667em\TeX\kern-.0333emt} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo} @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ For this release we made the following changes to this package: single and double-column floats (as they are placed independently of each other). This was corrected in \textsf{fixltx2e} a few years ago but the fix was not perfect as one situation using - \verb=\enlargethispage= generated a low-level \TeX{} error. + \verb=\enlargethispage= generated a low-level \TeX{} error. This behaviour of the package is now improved. \end{itemize} @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ at the start of list items, and to work if brace groups (\verb|{| and \paragraph{\textsf{color} updates} -The \verb|\nopagecolor| command suggested by Heiko Oberdiek, +The \verb|\nopagecolor| command suggested by Heiko Oberdiek, available for some years in the \textsf{pdftex} option, has been added to the core package as suggested in graphics/3873. Currently this is supported in the driver files for \textsf{dvips} and @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ this is supported in the driver files for \textsf{dvips} and \paragraph{\textsf{graphicx} updates} -The \textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\rotatebox| now allows +The \textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\rotatebox| now allows \verb|\par| (and blank lines) in values, to match the change made to the \textsf{graphics} version some years ago. See graphics/4296. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf Binary files differindex 8c5376623b4..e9a62a30678 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.tex index 65d7db900a2..c6cfec6c452 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews22.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2015-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2015-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ For some years we have supplied bug fixes to the \LaTeXe\ kernel via the \textsf{fixltx2e} package. This kept the kernel stable, but at the expense of meaning that most users did not -benefit from bug fixes, and that some compromises +benefit from bug fixes, and that some compromises which were made to save space in the machines of the time are still affecting most users today. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ then in a document using a format dated 2015/06/01 or later, the ``new code'' will be used, and for documents being processed with an older format, the ``original'' code will be used. Note the format date here may be the original format date as shown at the start of every \LaTeX\ run, or a format date -specified as a package option to the \textsf{latexrelease} package. +specified as a package option to the \textsf{latexrelease} package. So if the document has \begin{verbatim} @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ The new allocation mechanism in this release incorporates a new command \verb|\extrafloats|. If you get the error: \mbox{\texttt{Too many unprocessed floats.}} then you can add (say) \verb|\extrafloats{500}| to the document preamble to -make many more boxes available to hold floats. +make many more boxes available to hold floats. \subsection{Built-in support for Unicode engines} @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ make many more boxes available to hold floats. The kernel sources now detect the engine being used and adjust definitions accordingly, this reduces the need for the ``\texttt{.ini}'' files used to make the formats to patch definitions defined in \texttt{latex.ltx}. - + As noted above the format now includes extended allocation routines. The distribution includes a file \textsf{unicode-letters.def} derived from the diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf Binary files differindex f49a6db3cf0..0da1ae2ca2c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.tex index 693e22de831..e14a0697b07 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews23.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2015-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2015-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ at the start of the document. For detailed descriptions of the new allocation commands see the documented sources in \textsf{ltluatex.dtx} or chapter N of \textsf{source2e}; however, the following new allocation commands are -defined by default in \hologo{LuaTeX}: +defined by default in \hologo{LuaTeX}: \verb|\newattribute|, \verb|\newcatcodetable|, \verb|\newluafunction| and @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ defined by default in \hologo{LuaTeX}: In addition, the commands \verb|\setattribute| and \verb|\unsetattribute| are defined to set and unset Lua attributes (integer values similar to counters, but attached to nodes). Finally -several catcode tables are predefined: +several catcode tables are predefined: \verb|\catcodetable@initex|, \verb|\catcodetable@string|, \verb|\catcodetable@latex|, @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ the registering of Lua callback functions. \subsection{Support for older releases and plain \TeX} The \hologo{LuaTeX} allocation functionality made available in this -release is also available in plain \TeX\ and older \LaTeX\ releases +release is also available in plain \TeX\ and older \LaTeX\ releases in the files \textsf{ltluatex.tex} and \textsf{ltluatex.lua} which may be used simply by including the \TeX\ file: \verb|\input{ltluatex}|. An alternative for old \LaTeX\ releases is to use:\\ @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ been regenerated using the data files from Unicode~8.0.0. \section{Support for Comma Accent} The command \verb|\textcommabelow| has been added to the format. -This is mainly used for the Romanian letters +This is mainly used for the Romanian letters \textcommabelow{S}\textcommabelow{s}\textcommabelow{T}\textcommabelow{t}. This was requested in latex/4414 in the \LaTeX\ bug tracker. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf Binary files differindex 5284ce3ba6d..eb5e6b5a91f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.tex index 6cba173b606..6371ffa0a31 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews24.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2015-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2015-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ as \package{graphics}, \package{color}, \package{hyperref}, etc.). Until all contributed packages are updated to the new syntax users may need to add aliases for the old \hologo{pdfTeX} commands. A new \package{luapdftexalias} package has been contributed to CTAN (not part of the -core \LaTeX\ release) that may be used for this purpose. +core \LaTeX\ release) that may be used for this purpose. See also the sections below for related changes in the \textsf{tools} and \textsf{graphics} bundles. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ being used; however the \package{color} and \package{graphics} (and so The \package{trig} package has been updated so that pre-computed values such as $\sin(90)$ now expand to digits (\texttt{1} rather than the internal token \verb|\@one| in this case). This allows them to be used -directly in PDF literal strings. +directly in PDF literal strings. \section{Changes in Tools} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf Binary files differindex 03c632aeb06..0d219971c5d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.tex index 9d675015c3a..1500da5c07d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews25.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2016-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ to \verb|\mathchardef| in Lua\TeX. Since the launch of \LaTeXe\ in 1993, the \textsf{amsmath} bundle has been part of the \emph{required} packages in the core \LaTeX\ -distribution, with bug reports handled by the \LaTeX\ bug database at +distribution, with bug reports handled by the \LaTeX\ bug database at \url{https://latex-project.org/bugs-upload.html}. The \textsf{amsmath} packages and the \textsf{amscls} classes have diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf Binary files differindex 32891945fa0..0d4b3347c4c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.tex index a1362b3475b..134859ad63e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews26.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2017-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ The \textsf{amsmath} package has two updates at this release. \texttt{gathered} environments has been fixed: the spurious thin space is no longer added by default. Package options control this to revert to the original behaviour where required; see the - \textsf{amsldoc} guide for further details. + \textsf{amsldoc} guide for further details. \item The large delimiters around generalised fractions (for example in the \cs{binom} construct) did not work in previous releases if using \hologo{LuaTeX} or \hologo{XeTeX} with OpenType math fonts. This is diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf Binary files differindex 63dfd9e7adb..3336029eff1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.tex index 37b2fcf89e4..6b550bf0cd4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews27.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2017-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ in many Operating Systems and applications From this release, \LaTeX\ will accept ISO format date strings in the date argument of \verb|\ProvidesPackage|, \verb|\usepackage|, etc. Currently we recommend that you do not use this format in any packages -that need to work with older \LaTeX\ releases; +that need to work with older \LaTeX\ releases; the \textsf{latexrelease} package may be used with older releases to add this functionality. This change is handled in a special way by \textsf{latexrelease}: The package always adds support for ISO dates @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ The existing \LaTeX\ code for \verb|\verb| and \verb|verbatim| had some issues when used with fonts that were not loaded with hyphenation disabled via setting \verb|\hyphenchar| to $-1$. In this release these verbatim environments use a \verb|\language| setting, -\verb|\l@nohyphenation|, that has no hyphenation patterns associated. +\verb|\l@nohyphenation|, that has no hyphenation patterns associated. The format ensures that a language has been allocated with this name. For most users this will in fact be no change as the standard @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ In order that page breaks in \texttt{verbatim} do not influence the language used in the page head and foot, the format now normalises the language used in the output routine to a default language as described below. - + \section{Discretionary hyphenation} The \LaTeX\ definition of \verb|\-| has been adjusted so that it will insert the current font's \verb|\hyphenchar|, as would the @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ language packages such as \textsf{babel} may set this if the default behaviour is not suitable. \section{Line spacing in parboxes} -Inside a \verb|\parbox| +Inside a \verb|\parbox| \LaTeX\ normalises the baseline spacing. However it has not previously reset \verb|\lineskiplimit|. This meant that lines of a paragraph that have ascenders or descenders could be set @@ -131,5 +131,5 @@ happen if you use a \verb|\parbox| in an AMS alignment, as they use a relatively large value of \verb|\lineskiplimit|. As usual, the \textsf{latexrelease} package may be used to force the older behavior. - + \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf Binary files differindex 228b4859d61..45bb0f8435d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.tex index c8af784081f..71bdfc47111 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews28.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2017-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ With this release, the default encoding for \LaTeX\ files has been changed from the ``fall through raw'' encoding to UTF-8 if used with classic \TeX\ or \hologo{pdfTeX}. The implementation is essentially the same as the existing UTF-8 support from -\verb|\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}|. +\verb|\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}|. The \hologo{LuaTeX} and \hologo{XeTeX} engines always supported the UTF-8 encoding as their native (and only) input encoding, so with @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ up. software (which more or less didn't happen for nearly two decades) while continuing to maintain backward compatibility to the highest degree. - + In this release we have now extended this concept to the world of packages and classes which was not covered initially. As the classes and the extension packages have different @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ up. \section[Integration of \pkg{remreset} and \pkg{chngcntr} packages] - {Integration of \pkg{remreset} and \pkg{chngcntr} packages + {Integration of \pkg{remreset} and \pkg{chngcntr} packages into the kernel} With the optional argument to \cs{newcounter} \LaTeX{} offers to @@ -331,30 +331,30 @@ between 2016 and 2018. \begin{thebibliography}{9} - + \bibitem{Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. + \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018. \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{Mittelbach:Brno95} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{\LaTeXe{} Encoding Interface --- Purpose, concepts, and - Open Problems}. + \emph{\LaTeXe{} Encoding Interface --- Purpose, concepts, and + Open Problems}. Talk given in Brno June 1995. \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{Mittelbach:TB39-2} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{A rollback concept for packages and classes}. + \emph{A rollback concept for packages and classes}. Submitted to TUGboat. \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{Mittelbach:TB38-2-213} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{\LaTeX{} table columns with fixed widths}. + \emph{\LaTeX{} table columns with fixed widths}. In: TUGboat, 38\#2, 2017. \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{amsldoc} American Mathematical Society and The \LaTeX3 Project: - \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} package} (Version 2.1). + \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} package} (Version 2.1). April 2018. Available from \url{https://www.ctan.org} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf Binary files differindex 30f938f343f..5982babe53e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.tex index 78a1b2e60fd..c707c653422 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews29.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2018-2019 +% Copyright (C) 2018-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere % in this file. % @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ These include: \enquote{\guillemotright} in all encoding files. These correct names are in addition to the old (but wrong) Adobe names: Adobe mistakenly called them Guillemot, which is a sea bird. -% +% \githubissue{65} % \item @@ -225,14 +225,14 @@ for example \DeclareRobustCommand\verbvisiblespace {\textvisiblespace} \end{verbatim} -will select the the ``official'' visible space character of the +will select the ``official'' visible space character of the current font. This may look like the natural default, but it wasn't chosen as our default because many fonts just don't have that Unicode character, or they have one with a strange shape. % \githubissue[s]{69 and 70} - + \subsection{Error message corrected} Trying to redefine an undefined command could in a few cases generate an error message with a missing space, e.g., @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ This is now fixed. % \githubissue{41} - + \subsection{Fixed fatal link error with \pkg{hyperref}} If an \cs{href} link text gets broken across pages, \pdfTeX{} and @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ major data structures. As a result, many things are internally modeled as paragraphs even if they are not conceptually ``text paragraphs'' in -the traditional sense. +the traditional sense. In a few cases this has some surprising effects that are not always for the better. One example is @@ -347,21 +347,21 @@ corrected, and a corresponding update has been made to the \pkg{amsmath} package, in which these commands are also defined. % \githubissue[s]{49 and 50} - - + + \subsection{Guarding \cs{pfill} in \pkg{doc}} For presenting index entries pointing to code fragments and the like, the \pkg{doc} package has a \cs{pfill} command that -generates within the index a line of dots leading from +generates within the index a line of dots leading from the command name to the page or code line numbers. If necessary it would automatically split the entry over two lines. That worked well enough for a quarter century, but we -discovered recently that it is broken inside +discovered recently that it is broken inside the \cls{ltugboat} class, -where it sometimes produces +where it sometimes produces bad spacing within continuation lines. The reason turned out to be a redefinition of the \LaTeX{} command @@ -375,10 +375,10 @@ removal of space. % \githubissue[s]{25 and 75} - - + + \section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{tools} category} \subsection{Sometimes the \pkg{trace} package turned off too much} @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ The \cs{docolaction} command can be used to carry out actions depending on the column you are currently in, i.e., first, any inner one (if more than two) or last. However, if the action generates text then there is the question: is this text part of the current column or -the one after? That is, on the next run, do we test before or after it, +the one after? That is, on the next run, do we test before or after it, to determine in which column we are? This is now resolved as follows: if you use \cs{docolaction*} any @@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ topics~\cite{29:site-pub}. Feel free to take a look. Yukitoshi Fujimura has kindly translated into Japanese two documents that are distributed with standard \LaTeX{}. -These are: +These are: \begin{itemize} \item \LaTeXe{} for authors; @@ -491,30 +491,30 @@ You will now also find there a typeset version of the full \LaTeXe{} source code (with index etc.\@) and a number of other goodies. - + \begin{thebibliography}{9} - + \bibitem{29:Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. + \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018. \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{29:ltnews28} - \emph{\LaTeX{} News, Issue 28}. + \emph{\LaTeX{} News, Issue 28}. In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018.\\ \rlap{\url{https://latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/}} -\bibitem{29:site-doc} - \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ +\bibitem{29:site-doc} + \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/} -\bibitem{29:site-pub} +\bibitem{29:site-pub} \emph{\LaTeX{} Project publications on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{29:amsldoc} American Mathematical Society and The \LaTeX3 Project: - \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} Package} (Version 2.1). + \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} Package} (Version 2.1). April 2018. Available from \url{https://www.ctan.org} @@ -523,4 +523,3 @@ source code (with index etc.\@) and a number of other goodies. \end{thebibliography} \end{document} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf Binary files differindex 9c925c91f1e..fe49f085c8f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.tex index cfc1430fb8b..d09e1fe2b02 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews30.tex @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ then you will be greeted on the screen with something like \texttt{LaTeX2e <2019-10-01> pre-release-2} (identifying the pre-release format) instead of the normal \texttt{LaTeX2e <2018-12-01>}. In this pre-release you will find the latest new features that we have -developed. +developed. \subsection{Our hopes} @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ the process are available in an upcoming \textsl{TUGboat} article: \enquote{The \subsection{Setting up menu items} -While the command line call works out of the box if you have a recent +While the command line call works out of the box if you have a recent \TL{} or \MiKTeX{} installation, its use within an integrated editing environment doesn’t at this point in time (maybe the developers of these editors will include it in the future). However, @@ -230,13 +230,13 @@ better support for \acro{utf}-8 characters when using \pdfTeX{}.\footnote{The yet as they don't support the primitive \cs{ifincsname}. Work is under way to resolve this in the engines.} -When using a \enquote{Unicode engine}, -any Unicode character (that is not acting as a command, -i.e., is not \enquote{active}) +When using a \enquote{Unicode engine}, +any Unicode character (that is not acting as a command, +i.e., is not \enquote{active}) can be used as part of the \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanism or can be displayed in a message or written to a file. In 8-bit engines, however, this was severely -restricted: +restricted: essentially you had to limit yourself to using \acro{ascii} letters, digits and a few punctuation symbols. With the new release, most of these restrictions have been removed and you now @@ -247,17 +247,17 @@ can write labels such as or use accented characters, etc., as part of a \cs{typeout} message. The only requirement remaining is that only those \acro{utf}-8 characters that are also available for typesetting can be used, i.e., only those -characters for +characters for which adequate font support is loaded. Otherwise you will get an -error message stating that -the +error message stating that +the particular Unicode character is not set up for use with \LaTeX{}. -Note, however, that the restrictions on what characters can be -used in the names of commands have not changed. +Note, however, that the restrictions on what characters can be +used in the names of commands have not changed. -What is not possible when using +What is not possible when using an 8-bit engine such as \pdfTeX{} is to use characters other than \acro{ascii} letters as part of a command name. This is due to the fact that all other characters in such @@ -267,12 +267,12 @@ sequence of bytes and this is not supported in command names. \section{Improving file name handling in \pdfTeX{}} A related change is that file names used as part of \cs{input}, -\cs{includegraphics}, etc., commands -can now contain any -Unicode characters allowed by the file system in use, -including spaces. -In this case, - even characters that can't be typeset +\cs{includegraphics}, etc., commands +can now contain any +Unicode characters allowed by the file system in use, +including spaces. +In this case, + even characters that can't be typeset (due to lack of font support) can be used. @@ -280,31 +280,31 @@ In this case, The \env{filecontents} environment now supports an optional argument in which you can specify that it is allowed to \option{overwrite} an -already existing file; - by default nothing is written if a file with the given name +already existing file; + by default nothing is written if a file with the given name exists anywhere in the search tree. An alternative name for this -option is \texttt{force}. +option is \texttt{force}. Even then the environment will refuse to write to \cs{jobname}\texttt{.tex} to avoid clobbering its own input file. However, if you use a different extension on your input file you could still overwrite it (there is no way to test for that). There is also an -option -\option{nosearch}, +option +\option{nosearch}, which specifies that only the current directory is -examined for an existing file, not the whole \TeX{} inputs tree. +examined for an existing file, not the whole \TeX{} inputs tree. This is useful if you want to write a local copy of a standard system file. -Finally, \option{noheader} prevents writing a preamble to the file -(this +Finally, \option{noheader} prevents writing a preamble to the file +(this is the same as using the star form of the environment). -Another change is that this -environment is -now allowed anywhere in the document, +Another change is that this +environment is +now allowed anywhere in the document, which means -it provides everything (and more) of what the now obsolete +it provides everything (and more) of what the now obsolete \pkg{filecontents} package provided. @@ -313,13 +313,13 @@ it provides everything (and more) of what the now obsolete In the early days of \LaTeX{} many commands were fragile, i.e., they needed \cs{protect} in front of them when used in places such as -section headings and other \enquote{moving arguments}, etc. -In \LaTeXe{} many of these commands were made robust, +section headings and other \enquote{moving arguments}, etc. +In \LaTeXe{} many of these commands were made robust, but still a fairly large number remained unnecessarily fragile. -In this release of \LaTeX{} we have now +In this release of \LaTeX{} we have now made a lot more commands robust. -There is a very small collection of commands that must stay fragile +There is a very small collection of commands that must stay fragile because their expansion (maybe partially) at just the right time is critical. Yet others are unlikely to ever be needed in a \enquote{moving argument}. @@ -335,15 +335,15 @@ in the end we overcame that hurdle too, so now environments are automatically robust if used in places like headings or \verb=\typeout= and so forth. -%%CCC do we need to say something about possible problems if other packages +%%CCC do we need to say something about possible problems if other packages %% or documents have redefined commands whose robustness has changed? -What hasn't been tackled yet is the redefinitions in \pkg{amsmath}: +What hasn't been tackled yet is the redefinitions in \pkg{amsmath}: this package redefines a number of basic math constructs -that are now robust, so that +that are now robust, so that they become fragile again -once the package is loaded. +once the package is loaded. This area will be addressed in a followup release. % \githubissue{123} @@ -354,13 +354,13 @@ This area will be addressed in a followup release. \subsection{Guard against \cs{unskip} in tabular cells} -If a \env{tabular} or \env{array} cell started with a -command that started with an -\cs{unskip} -then centering the column broke - because the stretching glue - on the left got removed. The fix for this was to add - a minuscule, and hence unnoticeable, additional space after the stretching space: +If a \env{tabular} or \env{array} cell started with a +command that started with an +\cs{unskip} +then centering the column broke + because the stretching glue + on the left got removed. The fix for this was to add + a minuscule, and hence unnoticeable, additional space after the stretching space: removing this extra space causes no problems. This change was also applied in the \pkg{array} package. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ This change was also applied in the \pkg{array} package. \githubissue{102} -\subsection{Fix Unicode table data} +\subsection{Fix Unicode table data} \texttt{U+012F} which is \enquote{i with ogonek} produced a \enquote{dotless i with ogonek} by mistake. This has been corrected. @@ -384,15 +384,15 @@ In the past they raised a \githubissue{110} When doing cut-and-paste from other documents or websites, f-ligatures and others ligatures -might end up as +might end up as single Unicode characters in your file. In the past those got rejected by \LaTeX{}. - We + We now define those Unicode slots and map them back to the sequence of individual characters constituting the ligature. If supported by the current font (which is normally the case) they -are then reconstructed as ligatures and thus get typeset -as desired. +are then reconstructed as ligatures and thus get typeset +as desired. Otherwise they will come out as individual characters which is still better than an error message. @@ -419,17 +419,17 @@ The packages \pkg{fncylab} and \pkg{varioref} provided a slightly improved definition of \cs{refstepcounter} which allowed the internal -\cs{p@..} commands to receive the counter value as an argument, -instead of -acting as a simple prefix. This supports -more complex -formatting of the value in the reference. +\cs{p@..} commands to receive the counter value as an argument, +instead of +acting as a simple prefix. This supports +more complex +formatting of the value in the reference. These packages also provided the command \cs{labelformat} to help in the specification of such formatting in an easy way. For -example, \verb=\labelformat{equation}{eq.~(#1)}= specifies that +example, \verb=\labelformat{equation}{eq.~(#1)}= specifies that references to equations automatically come out as \enquote{eq.~(5)} or similar. As such a \cs{labelformat} declaration @@ -438,8 +438,8 @@ longer be successfully used at the start of a sentence, the packages also provided \cs{Ref} for such scenarios. Both of these commands, \cs{labelformat} and \cs{Ref}, -are now removed from the packages and instead made available in -the kernel so there is no +are now removed from the packages and instead made available in +the kernel so there is no need to load additional packages. @@ -454,19 +454,19 @@ messages to match style of similar messages. \githubissue{107} -\subsection{Avoid bad side-effects of \cs{DeclareErrorFont}} +\subsection{Avoid bad side-effects of \cs{DeclareErrorFont}} As a side effect of setting up the error font for \acro{nfss}, this declaration also changed the current font size back to 10pt. In most circumstances that doesn't matter, because that declaration was meant -to be used only during the format generation and not during -a \LaTeX{} run. +to be used only during the format generation and not during +a \LaTeX{} run. However, it has turned out to be used by some developers in other places (incorrectly in fact: -e.g., inside some \texttt{.fd} files) where -resetting the size causes +e.g., inside some \texttt{.fd} files) where +resetting the size causes havoc seemingly at random. The command has now changed to not produce such side effects. @@ -478,11 +478,11 @@ The command has now changed to not produce such side effects. \subsection{\pkg{nfssfont}: Make font table generation the default action} With the small file \texttt{nfssfont.tex} it is possible to produce -font tables and other font tests -in the style set up by Don Knuth. -In nearly all cases -a font table is wanted, -so this action has been made the default. +font tables and other font tests +in the style set up by Don Knuth. +In nearly all cases +a font table is wanted, +so this action has been made the default. Now one can simply hit enter instead of having to write \verb=\table\bye=. @@ -490,12 +490,12 @@ instead of having to write \verb=\table\bye=. \subsection{\pkg{trace}: Add package support in the kernel} The \pkg{trace} package implements the commands \cs{traceon} -and \cs{traceoff} that work like +and \cs{traceoff} that work like \cs{tracingall} but skip certain code blocks that produce a lot of tracing output. %%CCC being of no interest to anyone!! -- FMi I love your encouragement -This is useful when debugging, to suppress uninteresting tracing -from, for example, loading a font. +This is useful when debugging, to suppress uninteresting tracing +from, for example, loading a font. Code blocks that should not be traced need to be surrounded by the commands \cs{conditionally@traceoff} and \cs{conditionally@traceon}. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ regardless of \pkg{trace} being loaded or not. - + \section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{tools} category} \subsection{\pkg{array}: Warn if primitive column specifiers are overwritten} @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ With \cs{newcolumntype} it is possible to define your own column specifiers for a \texttt{tabular} preamble; it is also possible to change existing ones. However, doing that for a primitive column specifier, such as \texttt{c}, is seldom a good idea, since then its -functionality becomes unavailable. +functionality becomes unavailable. The package was therefore supposed to warn the user in this case, but due to a missing \cs{expandafter} in the code it never did---now it does. @@ -526,19 +526,19 @@ in the code it never did---now it does. \subsection{\pkg{multicol}: Introduce \texttt{minrows} counter for balancing} When there are only a few lines of text on a page at the end of a -\env{multicols} environment, -balancing the columns often looks rather odd: such as +\env{multicols} environment, +balancing the columns often looks rather odd: such as three columns each containing a single line. The balancing behavior -can now be controlled through the counter \texttt{minrows} -(default is~1) which specifies that, -after balancing, there must be at least that many lines in the first column. +can now be controlled through the counter \texttt{minrows} +(default is~1) which specifies that, +after balancing, there must be at least that many lines in the first column. Thus, if you set \texttt{minrows} -to \texttt{2} then you +to \texttt{2} then you would get a -distribution of \texttt{2+1+0} lines and if set +distribution of \texttt{2+1+0} lines and if set to three, the result -would be -\texttt{3+0+0} instead of the default \texttt{1+1+1}. +would be +\texttt{3+0+0} instead of the default \texttt{1+1+1}. What is most appropriate really depends on the circumstances, but this now gives you the tools to make local or global adjustments. @@ -550,13 +550,13 @@ The \pkg{varioref} package has been internally updated to provide better interfaces for packages such as \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{cleveref}. -It also +It also has a new package option \option{nospace} that stops \pkg{varioref} from meddling with space in front of its commands. The original behavior was always somewhat problematical and it is -suggested that -all new documents +suggested that +all new documents use this option (which should really have been the default). @@ -565,15 +565,15 @@ Support was also added for the Arabic language through the option - + \subsection[\pkg{xr}: Support citations to bibliographies in\\ external documents] {\pkg{xr}: Support citations to bibliographies in external documents} -The \pkg{xr} package can be used to cross-reference an external \LaTeX{} -document. +The \pkg{xr} package can be used to cross-reference an external \LaTeX{} +document. This means that even when a work is split over different documents (that -need to be processed separately), \cs{ref} or \cs{pageref} can use labels from -any document, creating links between them. This facility has now been extended +need to be processed separately), \cs{ref} or \cs{pageref} can use labels from +any document, creating links between them. This facility has now been extended so that \cs{cite} commands and their cousins can now also reference bibliographies in external documents; this feature was first provided in the package @@ -588,10 +588,10 @@ package. \subsection{\pkg{amsmath}: Introduce \cs{overunderset} command} -The \pkg{amsmath} package has always offered +The \pkg{amsmath} package has always offered the commands \cs{overset} and \cs{underset} to produce binary operators with something set above or -below. But sometimes one needs to put something above and something below: +below. But sometimes one needs to put something above and something below: The newly added \cs{overunderset} makes this easily possible. @@ -601,10 +601,10 @@ easily possible. There are a number of %small -documentation updates in files +documentation updates in files on the documentation page of the project website~\cite{30:site-doc}. -\subsection{Highlighting the standard \texorpdfstring{\acro{nfss}}{NFSS} codes for series} +\subsection{Highlighting the standard \texorpdfstring{\acro{nfss}}{NFSS} codes for series} The \emph{Font Selection Guide}~\cite{fntguide} has been updated to strongly recommend that the standard codes should be used @@ -619,14 +619,14 @@ etc. Over the years people came up with a number of other creative short codes like \texttt{k}, \texttt{j}, \texttt{t} and others with the result that changing a font family required different codes and thus prevented users from easily mixing and matching different -families. +families. Some work has been undertaken to get back to a coherent scheme and all the font families supported through the program \texttt{autoinst} -are now producing the standard codes again. +are now producing the standard codes again. \subsection{\LaTeX{} \texttt{base} and \texttt{doc} distribution reunited} - + For a long time the \LaTeX{} distribution available from \CTAN{} was split into several parts to allow them to be uploaded or downloaded separately. As this is these days more confusing than helpful we have @@ -641,25 +641,25 @@ is no longer separately available from \CTAN{} but contained in the %\fontsize{9.3}{11.3}\selectfont \bibitem{30:Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach: - \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. + \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}. In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018. \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{devformat} Frank Mittelbach: \emph{The - \LaTeX{} release workflow and the \LaTeX{} dev formats}. + \LaTeX{} release workflow and the \LaTeX{} dev formats}. In: TUGboat, 40\#2, 2019. \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} \bibitem{fntguide} \LaTeX{} Project Team: - \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection}.\\ + \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection}.\\ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/} -\bibitem{30:site-doc} - \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ +\bibitem{30:site-doc} + \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/} -%\bibitem{30:site-pub} +%\bibitem{30:site-pub} % \emph{\LaTeX{} Project publications on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ % \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e69083c7f92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5622ea103f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews31.tex @@ -0,0 +1,768 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2019-2020 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2008 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews31.tex +% +% This is issue 31 of LaTeX News. + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2020-02-02] + +\documentclass{ltnews} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo} + +\usepackage{csquotes} +\usepackage{multicol} + +\providecommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1}$\rangle$} +\providecommand\option[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}} + + +\providecommand\XeTeX{\hologo{XeTeX}} +\providecommand\LuaTeX{\hologo{LuaTeX}} +\providecommand\pdfTeX{\hologo{pdfTeX}} +\providecommand\MiKTeX{\hologo{MiKTeX}} +\providecommand\CTAN{\textsc{ctan}} +\providecommand\TL{\TeX\,Live} +\providecommand\githubissue[2][]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi + \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill + \mbox{\small\slshape(% + \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/\getfirstgithubissue#2 \relax}% + {github issue#1 #2}% + )}% + \par\smallskip} + +% simple solution right now (just link to the first issue if there are more) +\def\getfirstgithubissue#1 #2\relax{#1} + +\providecommand\sxissue[1]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi + \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill + \mbox{\small\slshape(\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/#1})}\par} + +\providecommand\gnatsissue[2]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi + \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill + \mbox{\small\slshape(% + \href{https://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=#1\%2F#2}% + {gnats issue #1/#2}% + )}% + \par} + +\let\cls\pkg +\providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}} + +\vbadness=1400 % accept slightly empty columns + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\iffalse % only for TUB production +\usepackage{graphicx} +\makeatletter +% Xe\TeX{} requires reflecting the first E, hence we complain if the +% graphics package is not present. (For plain documents, this can be +% loaded via Eplain.) Also, at Barbara's suggestion, if the current +% font is slanted, we rotate by 180 instead of reflecting so there is at +% least a chance to look ok. (The magic values here seem more or less +% ok for \texttt{cmsl} and \texttt{cmti}.) +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\tubreflect#1{% + \@ifundefined{reflectbox}{% + \TBerror{A graphics package must be loaded for \string\XeTeX}% + }{% + \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt + \raise 1.6ex \hbox{\kern.1em\rotatebox{180}{#1}}\kern-.1em + \else + \reflectbox{#1}% + \fi + }% +} +\def\tubhideheight#1{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}\ht0=0pt \dp0=0pt \box0 } +\def\XekernbeforeE{-.125em} +\def\XekernafterE{-.1667em} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\Xe}{\leavevmode + \tubhideheight{\hbox{X% + \setbox0=\hbox{\TeX}\setbox1=\hbox{E}% + \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt \def\XekernbeforeE{0em}\fi + \lower\dp0\hbox{\raise\dp1\hbox{\kern\XekernbeforeE\tubreflect{E}}}% + \kern\XekernafterE}}} +\def\XeTeX{\Xe\TeX} +\def\XeLaTeX{\Xe{\kern.11em \LaTeX}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\publicationmonth{February} +\publicationyear{2020} + +\publicationissue{31} + +\begin{document} + +%\addtolength\textheight{4.2pc} % only for TUB + +\maketitle +{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \spaceskip=3.33pt \hbadness=10000 \tableofcontents} + +\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em} + + +\medskip + + +%\section{Introduction} +% +%This document is under construction \ldots + + +\section{Experiences with the \LaTeX\ \texttt{-dev} formats} + +As reported in the previous \emph{\LaTeX{} News}, we have made a pre-release +version of the \LaTeX{} kernel available as \LaTeX\texttt{-dev}. Overall, the +approach of having an explicit testing release has been positive: it is now +readily available in \TeX{} systems and is getting real use\\ +beyond the team. + +The current +release has been tested by a number of people, and we have had valuable feedback +on a range of the new ideas. This has allowed us to fix issues in several of the +new features, as described below. + + +We wish to thank all the dedicated users who have been +trying out the development formats, and we encourage others to do so. Pre-testing +in this way does mean that, for the vast majority of users, problems are solved +before they even appear! + + +\section{Concerning this release \ldots (Lua\LaTeX{} engine)} + +The new LuaHB\TeX{} engine is Lua\TeX{} with an embedded HarfBuzz library. +HarfBuzz can be used by setting a suitable renderer in the font +declaration. A basic interface for that is provided by \pkg{fontspec}. +This additional font renderer will greatly improve the shaping of +various scripts when using Lua\LaTeX{}, many of which are currently handled correctly only by +\XeTeX{}, which always uses HarfBuzz. + +To simplify testing of the new engine, binaries have +already been added to MiK\TeX{} and \TeX{}~Live 2019 and both distributions have already now changed +the Lua\LaTeX-dev format to use it. + +Going forward, Lua\LaTeX\ (and Lua\LaTeX-dev) will both use the LuaHB\TeX{} +engine. +The timing of the switch to the LuaHB\TeX{} engine +depends on the distribution you use +(for \TeX{}~Live this will be with \TeX{}~Live 2020). + + + + +\section{Improved load-times for \pkg{expl3}} + +The \LaTeX3 programming layer, \pkg{expl3}, has over the past decade moved from +being largely experimental to broadly stable. It is now used in a significant +number of third-party packages, most notably \pkg{xparse}, for defining +interfaces in cases where no \pkg{expl3} code is \enquote{visible}. In addition, most +\LaTeX{} documents compiled using \XeTeX{} or \LuaTeX{} load \pkg{fontspec}, +which is written using \pkg{expl3}. + +The \pkg{expl3} layer contains a non-trivial number of macros, and when used +with the \XeTeX{} and \LuaTeX{} engines, it also loads a large body of Unicode data. +This means that even on a fast computer, there is a relatively large load time when +using \pkg{expl3}. + +For this release, the team have made adjustments in the \LaTeXe{} kernel to +pre-load a significant portion of \pkg{expl3} when the format is built. This is +transparent to the user, other than the significant decrease in document +processing time: there will be no \enquote{pause} whilst loading the Unicode data +files. Loading \pkg{expl3} in documents and packages can continue to be done as usual; +eventually, it will be possible to omit +\begin{verbatim} +\RequirePackage{expl3} +\end{verbatim} +entirely but, to support older formats, this is still recommended at present. + + +\section[Improvements to \LaTeX{} font selection: NFSS] + {Improvements to \LaTeX{}'s font selection\\ mechanism (NFSS)} + + +\subsection{Extending the shape management in NFSS} + +Over time, more and more fonts have become available for use with +\LaTeX{}. Many such font families offer additional shapes such as small +caps italic (\texttt{scit}), small caps slanted (\texttt{scsl}) or +swash (\texttt{sw}). +By using \cs{fontshape} those shapes can +be explicitly selected. For the swash shapes there is also +\cs{swshape} and \cs{textsw} available. + +In the original font selection implementation a request to select a new shape +always overrode the current shape. With the 2020 release of \LaTeX{} +this has changed and \cs{fontshape} can now be used to combine small +capitals with italic, slanted or swash letters, either by explicitly +asking for \texttt{scit}, etc., or by asking for italics when typesetting +already in small caps, and so forth. + +Using \cs{upshape} will still change italics or slanted back to an +upright shape but will not any longer alter the small caps setting. To +change small capitals back to upper/lower case you can now use +\cs{ulcshape} (or \cs{textulc}) which in turn will not change the font +with respect to italics, slanted or swash. +% +There is one exception: for compatibility reasons \cs{upshape} will +change small capitals back to upright (\texttt{n} shape), if the +current shape is \texttt{sc}. This is done so that something like +\cs{scshape}\allowbreak\texttt{...}\allowbreak\cs{upshape} continues +to work as before, but we suggest that you don't use that deprecated method in +new documents. + + +Finally, if you want to +reset the shape back to normal you can use \cs{normalshape} which is a +shorthand for \cs{upshape}\cs{ulcshape}. + +The way that shapes combine with each other is not hardwired; it is +customizable and extensible if there is ever a need for this. The +mappings +are defined through \cs{DeclareFontShapeChangeRule} and the +details for developers are documented in \texttt{source2e.pdf}. + +The ideas for this interface extension have been pioneered in +\pkg{fontspec} by Will Robertson for Unicode engines, and in +\pkg{fontaxes} by Andreas Bühmann and Michael Ummels for \pdfTeX{}; +they are by now used in many font support packages. + + +\subsection{Extending the font series management in NFSS} + +Many of the newer font families also come provided with additional +weights (thin, semi-bold, ultra-bold, etc.)\ or several running widths, +such as condensed or extra-condensed. In some cases the number of +different values for series (weight plus width) is really impressive: +for example, Noto Sans +offers 36 fonts, from ultra-light extra condensed to ultra-bold medium width. + +Already in its original design, NFSS supported 9 weight levels, from +ultra-light (\texttt{ul}) to ultra-bold (\texttt{ub}), and also 9 width +levels, from ultra-condensed (\texttt{uc}) to ultra-expanded +(\texttt{ux}): more than enough, even for a font family like Noto +Sans. Unfortunately, some font support packages nevertheless invented +their own names, so in recent years you have been able to find all kinds of +non-standard series names (\texttt{k}, \texttt{i}, \texttt{j} and +others), making it impossible to combine different fonts successfully +using the standard NFSS mechanisms. + +Over the course of the last year a small number of individuals, +notably, Bob Tennent, Michael Sharpe and Marc Penninga, have worked hard to +bring this unsatisfactory situation back under control; so today we are +happy to report that the internal font support files for more than a +hundred font families are all back to following the standard NFSS conventions. +Combining them is now again rather nice and easy, and from a technical +perspective they can now be easily matched; but, of course, +there is still the task of choosing combinations that visually work +well together. + +In the original font selection implementation, a request to select a new series +always overrode the current one. This was reasonable because there +were nearly no fonts available that offered anything other than a +medium or a bold series. Now that this has changed and families such +as Noto Sans are available, combining weight and width into a single +attribute is no longer appropriate. With the 2020 release of \LaTeX{}, +the management of series therefore changed to allow independent +settings of the weight and the width attributes of the series. + +For most users this change will be largely transparent as \LaTeX{} +offers only \cs{textbf} or \cs{bfseries} to select a bolder face (and +\cs{textmd} and \cs{mdseries} to return to a medium series): there is no +high-level command for selecting a condensed face, etc. However, using +the NFSS low-level interface it is now possible to ask for, say, +\verb=\fontseries{c}\selectfont= to get a condensed +face (suitable for a marginal note) and that would still allow +the use of \cs{textbf} inside the note, which would +select a bold-condensed face (and not a rather odd-looking +bold-extended face in the middle of condensed type). + +The expectation is that this functionality will be used largely by +class and package designers but, given that the low-level NFSS +commands are usable on the document level and that they are not really +difficult to apply, there are probably also a number of users who will +enjoy using these new possibilities that bring \LaTeX{} back into the +premier league for font usage. + +The ways in which the different series values combine with each other is not +hardwired but is again customizable and extensible. The mappings are +defined through \cs{DeclareFontSeriesChangeRule} and the details for +developers are documented in \texttt{source2e.pdf}. + + +\subsection{Font series defaults per document family} + +With additional weights and widths now being available in +many font families, it is more likely that somebody will want to +match, say, a medium weight serif family with a semi-light sans serif +family, or that with one family one wants to use the bold-extended +face when \cs{textbf} is used, while with another it should be bold +(not extended) or semibold, etc. + +In the past this kind of extension was provided by Bob Tennent's +\pkg{mweights} package, which has been used in many font +support packages. +With the 2020 release of \LaTeX{} this feature is now available out +of the box. In addition we also offer a document-level interface to adjust the +behavior of the high-level series commands \cs{textbf}, \cs{textmd}, and of their +declaration forms \cs{bfseries} and \cs{mdseries}, so that they can +have different effects for the serif, sans serif and typewriter +families used in a document. + +For example, specifying +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontSeriesDefault[rm]{bf}{sb} + \DeclareFontSeriesDefault[tt]{md}{lc} +\end{verbatim} +in the document preamble would result in \cs{textbf} producing +semi-bold (\texttt{sb}) when typesetting in a roman typeface. +The second line says that the +typewriter default face (i.e., the medium series \texttt{md}) should be +a light-condensed face. The optional argument here can be either +\texttt{rm}, \texttt{sf} or \texttt{tt} to indicate one of the three +main font families in a document; if omitted you will change the +overall document default instead. In the first mandatory argument you +specify either \texttt{md} or \texttt{bf} and the second mandatory +argument then gives the desired series value in NFSS nomenclature. + + +\subsection{Handling of nested emphasis} + +In previous releases of \LaTeX{}, nested \cs{emph} commands +automatically alternated between italics and upright. This mechanism +has now been generalised so that you can now specify for arbitrary nesting +levels how emphasis should be handled. + +The declaration \cs{DeclareEmphSequence} expects a comma separated +list of font declarations corresponding to increasing levels of +emphasis. For example, +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareEmphSequence{\itshape,% + \upshape\scshape,\itshape} +\end{verbatim} +uses italics for the first, small capitals for the second, and italic +small capitals for the third level (provided you use a font that +supports these shapes). If there are more nesting levels than +provided, \LaTeX{} uses the declarations stored in \cs{emreset} (by +default \cs{ulcshape}\cs{upshape}) for the next level and then +restarts the list. + +The mechanism tries to be \enquote{smart} by verifying that the given +declarations actually alter the current font. If not, it continues and +tries the next level---the assumption being that there was already a +manual font change in the document to the font that is now supposed to +be used for emphasis. +% +Of course, this only works if the declarations in the list's entries +actually change the font and not, for example, just the color. In such +a scenario one has to add \cs{emforce} to the entry, which directs the +mechanism to use the entry, even if the font attributes appear to be +unchanged. + + +\subsection{Providing font family substitutions} + +Given that \pdfTeX{} can only handle fonts with up to 256 glyphs, a +single font encoding can only support a few languages. The \texttt{T1} +encoding, for example, does support many Latin-based scripts, +but if you want to write in Greek or Cyrillic then you will need to switch +encodings to \texttt{LGR} or \texttt{T2A}. Given that not every font +family offers glyphs in such encodings, you may end up with some +default family (e.g., Computer Modern) that doesn’t blend in well +with the chosen document font. For such cases NFSS now offers +\cs{DeclareFontFamilySubstitution}, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontFamilySubstitution{LGR} + {Montserrat-LF}{IBMPlexSans-TLF} +\end{verbatim} +tells \LaTeX{} that if you are typesetting in the sans serif font +\texttt{Montserrat-LF} and the Greek encoding \texttt{LGR} is asked +for, then \LaTeX{} should use \texttt{IBMPlexSans-TLF} to fulfill +the encoding request. + +The code is based on ideas from the \pkg{substitutefont} +package by Günter Milde, but the implementation is different. + + +\subsection{Providing all text companion symbols by default} + +The text companion encoding \texttt{TS1} was originally not available +by default, but only when the \pkg{textcomp} package was loaded. The +main reason for this was limited availability of fonts with this encoding other than +Computer Modern; another was the memory restrictions back in the nineties. +These days neither limitation remains, so with the 2020 release all +the symbols provided with the \pkg{textcomp} package are available out +of the box. + +Furthermore, an intelligent substitution mechanism has been +implemented so that glyphs missing in some fonts are automatically +substituted with default glyphs that are sans serif if you typeset in +\cs{textsf} and monospaced if you typeset using \cs{texttt}. In the +past they were always taken from Computer Modern Roman if substitution +was necessary. + + +\typeout{^^J^^J***************************************} +\typeout{** This example needs LaTeX 2020-02-02} +\typeout{** to come out correctly !!} +\typeout{***************************************^^J^^J} + +\textsf{This is most noticeable with \cs{oldstylenums} which are now + taken from \texttt{TS1} so that you no longer get + \textrm{\oldstylenums{1234}} but \oldstylenums{1234} when typesetting + in sans serif fonts}\texttt{ and \oldstylenums{1234} when using + typewriter fonts.} + +If there ever is a need to use the original (inferior) definition, +then that remains available as \cs{legacyoldstylenums}; and to fully +revert to the old behavior there is also +\cs{UseLegacyTextSymbols}. The latter declaration reverts \cs{oldstylenums} +and also changes the footnote symbols, such as \cs{textdagger}, +\cs{textparagraph}, etc., to pick up their glyphs from the math +fonts instead of the current text font (this means they always keep +the same shape and do not nicely blend in with the text font). + +With the text companion symbols as part of the kernel, it is normally +no longer necessary to load the \pkg{textcomp} package, but for +backwards compatibility this package will remain available. There is, +however, one use case where it remains useful: if you load the package +with the option \texttt{error} or \texttt{warn} then substitutions +will change their behavior and result in a \LaTeX{} error or a +\LaTeX{} warning (on the terminal), respectively. Without the package +the substitution information only appears in the \texttt{.log} +file. If you use the option \texttt{quiet}, then even the information in +the transcript is suppressed (which is not really recommended). + + + +\subsection{New \texttt{alias} size function for use in \texttt{.fd} files} + +% These are really called ``size functions'' in NFSS, a bit weird I know + +Most of the newer fonts supported in \TeX{} have been set up with the +\texttt{autoinst} tool by Marc Penninga. In the past, this program +set up each font using the face name chosen by that font's designer, +e.g., \enquote{\texttt{regular}}, \enquote{\texttt{bold}}, etc. +These face names were then mapped by substitution to +the standard NFSS series names, i.e., \enquote{\texttt{m}} +or \enquote{\texttt{b}}. +As a result one got unnecessary substitution warnings such as +\enquote{\texttt{Font T1/abc/bold/n not found, using T1/abc/b/n instead}}. + +%FMi the message above is actually different and longer but ... + +We now provide a new NFSS size function, \texttt{alias}, that can +and will be used by \texttt{autoinst} in the future. It provides the +same functionality as the \texttt{subst} function but is less vocal +about its actions, so that only significant font substitutions show +up as warnings. + + +\subsection{Suppress unnecessary font substitution warnings} + +Many sans serif fonts do not have real italics but usually only +oblique/slanted shapes, so the substitution of slanted for italics is +natural and in fact many designers talk about italic sans serif faces +even if in reality they are oblique. + +With nearly all sans serif font families, the \LaTeX{} support files +therefore silently substitute slanted if you ask for \cs{itshape} or +\cs{textit}. This is also true for Computer Modern in \texttt{T1} +encoding but in \texttt{OT1} you got a warning on the terminal even +though there is nothing you can do about it. This has now been changed +to an information message only, written to the \texttt{.log} file. % +\githubissue{172} + +\vspace{-\smallskipamount} +\pagebreak + +\section{Other changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel} + + +\subsection{UTF-8 characters in package descriptions} + +In 2018 we made UTF-8 the default input encoding for \LaTeX{} but we +overlooked the case of non-ASCII characters in the short +package descriptions used in declarations, e.g., in the optional argument to +\cs{ProvidesPackage}. +They worked (sometimes) before, but the switch to UTF-8 made them always +generate an error. +This has been corrected. +% +\githubissue{52} + + +\subsection[Fix inconsistent hook setting when\texorpdfstring{\\}{} loading packages]% + {Fix inconsistent hook setting when loading packages} + +As part of loading a package, the command +\texttt{\textbackslash}\textit{package}\texttt{.sty-h@@k} gets +defined. However, attempting to load a package a second time resulted +in this hook becoming undefined again. Now the hook remains defined +so that extra loading attempts do not change the state of +\LaTeX{} (relevant only to package developers). +% +\githubissue{198} + + +\subsection{Avoid spurious warning if \texttt{LY1} is made the default encoding} + +Making \texttt{LY1} the default encoding, as is done by some font support +packages, gave a spurious warning even if \cs{rmdefault} was changed first. +This was corrected. +% +\githubissue{199} + +\enlargethispage{-\smallskipamount} +\vspace{-\medskipamount} + +\subsection{Ensure that \cs{\textbackslash} remains robust} + +In the last release we made most document-level commands robust, but +\cs{\textbackslash} became fragile again\\ +whenever \cs{raggedright} or similar typesetting\\ +was used. This has been fixed. +% +\githubissue{203} + + +\subsection{Make math delimiters robust in a different way} + +Making math delimiters robust caused an issue in some situations. This +has been corrected. This also involved a correction to \pkg{amsmath}. +% +\githubissue{251} + + +\subsection{Allow more write streams with \texttt{filecontents} in \LuaTeX} + +Most \TeX{} engines only support a maximum of sixteen concurrently +open write streams, and when those have been used up, then +\texttt{filecontents} or any other code trying to open one +will fail. +In \LuaTeX{} more write streams are available and those can +also now be utilised. +% +\githubissue{238} + +\subsection{Allow spaces in \texttt{filecontents} option list} + +Leaving spaces or newlines in the option list prevented the options +from being correctly recognized. This\\ +has been corrected. +% +\githubissue{256} + + +\subsection{New \texttt{reverselist} Lua callback type} + +A new callback type, \texttt{reverselist}, was added:\\ +\texttt{post\_mlist\_to\_hlist\_filter} and \texttt{post\_linebreak\_filter} +are now of this type. + + +\section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{graphics} category} + +\subsection[Make \pkg{color}/\pkg{graphics} user-level commands robust] + {Make \pkg{color} \& \pkg{graphics} user-level commands robust} + +Some of the user-level commands in \pkg{color}, \pkg{graphics} and +\pkg{graphicx}, +%\pagebreak +such as \cs{textcolor} or \cs{includegraphics}, were +still fragile so didn't work in moving arguments.\\ +All of these are now robust. +% +\githubissue{208} + + +\section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{tools} category} + +\subsection{Fixed column depth in boxed \texttt{multicols}} + +The \texttt{multicols} environment was setting \cs{maxdepth} when +splitting boxes; but, due to the way the internal interfaces of \LaTeX{} are +designed, it should have used \cs{@maxdepth} instead. As a result, +balanced boxed multicols sometimes ended up having different heights +even if they had exactly the same content. +% +\githubissue{190} + + +\subsection{Ensure that \texttt{multicols} does not lose text} + +The \texttt{multicols} environment needs a set of consecutively numbered boxes to +collect column material. The way those got allocated could result in +disaster if other packages allocated most boxes below box~255 (which +\TeX{} always uses for the output page). In the original +implementation that problem was avoided because one could only +allocate box numbers below~255, but nowadays the \LaTeX{} allocation routine +allows allocating box numbers both below and above~255. So the assumption that +when asking for, say, 20~boxes you always get a consecutive sequence of~20 box +register numbers became no longer true: +some of the column material could +end up in box~255, where it would get overwritten. This has now been corrected by +allocating all necessary boxes with numbers above~255 whenever there aren't enough +lower-numbered registers available. +% +\githubissue{237} + +\subsection{Allow spaces in \cs{hhline} arguments} + +The \verb|\hhline| command, which allows the +specification of rule segments in \texttt{tabular} environments, now +allows (but ignores) spaces between its tokens: so +\verb|\hhline{: = : =}| is now allowed and is equivalent to +\verb|\hhline{:=:=}|. This matches similar token arguments in \LaTeX{} +such as the \verb|[h t p]| argument on floats. A similar change has +been made to the extended \verb|\hhline| command in the +\texttt{colortbl} package. +% +\githubissue{242} + + + +\section{\LaTeX{} requirements on engine primitives} + +Since the finalization of \eTeX{} in 1999, a number of additional `utility' +primitives have been added to \pdfTeX{}. Several of these are broadly useful +and have been required by \pkg{expl3} for some time, most notably +\cs{pdfstrcmp}. Over time, a common set of these `post-\eTeX{}' primitives have +been incorporated into \XeTeX{} and (u)p-\TeX{}; they were already available in +\LuaTeX{}. + +A number of these additional primitives are needed to support new or improved +functionality in \LaTeX{}. This is seen for example in the improved UTF-8 handling, +which uses \cs{ifincsname}. The following primitive +functionality (which in \LuaTeX{} may be achieved using Lua code) +will therefore be \emph{required} by the \LaTeX{} kernel and core\\ +packages from the start of 2021: +% +\begingroup\setlength\columnsep{0pt} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\fontsize{9.3}{11.3}\selectfont +\begin{itemize} + \item \cs{expanded} + \item \cs{ifincsname} + \item \cs{ifpdfprimitive} + \item \cs{pdfcreationdate} + \item \cs{pdfelapsedtime} + \item \cs{pdffiledump} + \item \cs{pdffilemoddate} + \item \cs{pdffilesize} + \item \cs{pdflastxpos} + \item \cs{pdflastypos} + \item \cs{pdfmdfivesum} + \item \cs{pdfnormaldeviate} + \item \cs{pdfpageheight} + \item \cs{pdfpagewidth} +%\end{itemize} +%\end{multicols} +% +% very manual! multicol needs update to detect that it is used +% inside twocolumn! +% +%\begin{multicols}{2} +%\begin{itemize} + \item \cs{pdfprimitive} + \item \cs{pdfrandomseed} + \item \cs{pdfresettimer} + \item \cs{pdfsavepos} + \item \cs{pdfsetrandomseed} + \item \cs{pdfshellescape} + \item \cs{pdfstrcmp} + \item \cs{pdfuniformdeviate} +\end{itemize} +\end{multicols} +\endgroup +For ease of reference, these primitives will be referred to as the +`\pdfTeX{} utilities'. With the exception of \cs{expanded}, these have been +present in \pdfTeX{} since the release of version 1.40.0 in 2007; \cs{expanded} +was added for \TeX{}~Live 2019. Similarly, the full set of these utility primitives +has been available in \XeTeX{} from the 2019 \TeX{}~Live release, and has +always been available in \LuaTeX{} (some by Lua emulation). +% +The Japanese p\TeX{} and +up\TeX{} gained all of the above (except \cs{ifincsname}) for \TeX{}~Live +2019 and will both have that primitive also from the 2020 release onward. + +At the same time, engines which are fully Unicode-capable must provide +the following three primitives: + +\vspace{-\smallskipamount} +\begingroup\setlength\columnsep{0pt} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\fontsize{9.3}{11.3}\selectfont +\begin{itemize} + \item \cs{Uchar} + \quad \textbullet{}\hspace{\labelsep}\cs{Ucharcat} + \item \cs{Umathcode} +\end{itemize} +\end{multicols} +\vspace{-\smallskipamount} +\endgroup +% +Note that it has become standard practice to check for Unicode-aware engines +by using the existence of the \cs{Umathcode} primitive. As such, this is already +a requirement: engines lacking these primitives cannot use Unicode features +of the \LaTeXe{} kernel or \pkg{expl3}. Note also that up\TeX{} can +handling Unicode but it is not classed as a Unicode engine by the +base \LaTeX\ code. + +\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip} +\vspace{3.9pt} % manual adjustment to align the bottom + + +\begin{thebibliography}{9} + +\fontsize{9.3}{11.3}\selectfont + +\bibitem{31:devformat} Frank Mittelbach: + \emph{The + \LaTeX{} release workflow and the \LaTeX{} dev formats}. + In: TUGboat, 40\#2, 2019. + \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/} + +\bibitem{31:fntguide} \LaTeX{} Project Team: + \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection}.\\ + \url{https://latex-project.org/help/documentation/fntguide.pdf} + +\bibitem{31:site-doc} + \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\ + \url{https://latex-project.org/help/documentation/} + +\end{thebibliography} + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf Binary files differindex 4f7b97d5ae0..b972e62c0e4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex index d3a7542cfdb..ccb4e0ed99c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi \documentclass[a4paper]{article} @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ \title{\Large The \LaTeX3 Project} -\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \ +\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \ Frank Mittelbach and Chris Rowley} @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Chris Rowley} \item The printed documentation of CD-ROM collections that contain \LaTeX. \item On-line collections that include a significant proportion of - documents encoded in \LaTeX. + documents encoded in \LaTeX. \end{itemize} \end{abstract} @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ The purposes of the \LaTeX3 system can be summarized thus: it will greatly increase the range of documents which can be processed; and it will provide a flexible interface for typographic designers to easily specify the formatting of a class of documents. - + The \LaTeX3 Project Team is a small group of volunteers whose aim is to produce this major new document processing system based on the principles pioneered by Leslie Lamport in the current \LaTeX. @@ -122,11 +122,11 @@ enhanced by extensions to that core system. They will continue to develop and maintain this system, releasing updated versions every six months and recording these activities in the \LaTeX{} bugs database (see below). - + Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large sums of money. The \LaTeX3 Project Fund has therefore been set up to -channel money into this work. We know that some users are +channel money into this work. We know that some users are aware of this fund as they have already contributed to it---many thanks to all of them! If you want to know more about how you can help the project, see Page \pageref{fund}---and thanks in advance for @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ described as a world-wide de facto standard for high quality typesetting. Its use is particularly common in specialized areas, such as technical documents of various kinds, and for multi-lingual requirements. - + The \TeX{} system is fully programmable. This allows the development of high-level user interfaces whose input is processed by \TeX{}'s interpreter to produce low-level typesetting instructions; these are @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ long documents such as textbooks and manuals. It separates content and form as much as possible by providing the user with a generic (\ie logical rather than visual) mark-up interface; this is combined with style sheets which specify the formatting. - + Recent years have shown that the concepts and approach of \LaTeX{} are now widely accepted. Indeed, \LaTeX{} has become the standard method of communicating and publishing documents in many academic @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ considered a powerful combination of great importance to such areas as corporate documentation and publishing. This has also extended to on-line publishing using, for example, \PDF{} output incorporating hypertext and other active areas. - + With the spreading use of \SGML{}-compliant systems (\eg Web-based publishing using \HTML{} or \XML{}) \TeX{} again is a common choice as the formatting engine for high quality typeset output: a widely used @@ -210,9 +210,9 @@ necessary in, at least, the following areas: the extendibility (package interface); \item the layout specification of tabular material; - \item + \item the specification and inclusion of graphical material; - \item + \item the positioning of floating material, and other aspects of page layout; \item @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ necessary in, at least, the following areas: \item Font declaration and selection; \item Font and glyph handling within mathematical formulas; \item Handling multiple font glyph encodings within a document; -\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document; +\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document; \item A uniform interface for graphics inclusion; \item Support for coloured text; \item Building and interfacing new classes and extension packages. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ necessary in, at least, the following areas: The strengths of the present version of \LaTeX{} are as follows: \begin{itemize} - \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical + \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical formulas\\ and tabular material; \item separation of generic mark-up from visual formatting; @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ and tabular material; \begin{itemize} \item It will provide a syntax that allows highly automated translation - from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these + from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these will be provided as standard with the new version). The syntax of the new \LaTeX{} user-interface will, for example, @@ -287,14 +287,14 @@ and tabular material; could easily be interfaced to a visually-oriented, menu-driven specification system. - This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and + This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and style-sheet concepts such as those used with \HTML{} and \XML{}. - + \item It will provide an enhanced user-interface that allows expression of the typesetting requirements from a large range of subject areas. Some examples are listed here. - + \begin{itemize} \item The requirements of technical documentation (\eg offset layout,\\ change bars, etc). @@ -306,19 +306,19 @@ and tabular material; within text. \item the integration of hypertext and other links in on-line documents using systems such as \HTML{}, \XML{} and \PDF{}. - + \end{itemize} Special care will be taken to ensure that this interface is extensible: this will be achieved by use of modular designs. - - + + \item It will provide a more robust author-interface. For example, artificial restrictions on the nesting of commands will be removed. Error handling will be improved by adding a more effective, interactive help system. - + \item It will provide access to arbitrary fonts from any family (such as the \PS{} and TrueType fonts) including a wide range of fonts for @@ -330,17 +330,17 @@ and tabular material; system will provide extensive catalogues of examples, carefully designed to make the learning time for new users (both designers and authors) as short as possible. - + \item The code itself will be thoroughly documented and it will be designed on modular principles. Thus the system will be easy to maintain and to enhance. \end{itemize} - + The resulting new \LaTeX{} will, like the present version, be usable with any standard \TeX{} system (or whatever replaces it) and so will be freely available on a wide range of platforms. - + \section{\LaTeX{} documentation} @@ -363,10 +363,10 @@ project is: \end{citations} This \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on several aspects -of of the system. The newer features of the system are described in +of the system. The newer features of the system are described in the following documents: \begin{citations} -\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] +\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents, in the file \texttt{usrguide.tex}; \item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers] @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ sums of money. There are many necessities that need substantial financing: examples are new or enhanced computing equipment and travel to team meetings (the volunteers come from many different countries, so getting together occasionally is a non-trivial exercise). - + This is why we are appealing to you for contributions to the fund. Any sum will be much appreciated; the amount need not be large as small contributions add up to very useful amounts. Contributions of @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Contributions should be sent to one of the following addresses: \begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 2311, Portland, OR~97208-2311 USA\\ Fax:~+1~503~223~3960 \ Email: \texttt{tug@tug.org} - + \noindent UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB UK\\ Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} @@ -469,6 +469,3 @@ For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page. \end{document} - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf Binary files differindex 109f30a9439..b8102289c90 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/makeindx.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/makeindx.pdf Binary files differindex 016d77c40ac..724966fa3f2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/makeindx.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/makeindx.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt index ec747100572..6d5462aeb98 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt @@ -12,19 +12,19 @@ % manifest.txt -- This file. % % tex2.txt -- Extras for installing LaTeX on TeX2. -% +% % texpert.txt -- Documentation for TeX experts. % patches.txt -- Explains the patch mechanism. -% +% % legal.txt -- Copyright notice; warranty; copying conditions. % lppl.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current version). % lppl-1-0.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.0). % lppl-1-1.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1). % lppl-1-2.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.2). % lppl.tex -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current as .tex). -% +% % bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for LaTeX. -% +% % source2e.tex -- File to produce kernel documentation. % changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order. % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err index e78b18de9f6..c6ea889ed38 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Please report any additional errors to The \LaTeX\ Project at Replace \verb|{\em all\/}| by \verb|\emph{all}|. \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} -\erratum{page 28, first paragraph} +\erratum{page 28, first paragraph} Not an error, but it would be helpful to add the following sentence to the end of that paragraph: ``(If a declaration has arguments, they become additional @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Change \verb|{\em ...}| to \verb|\emph{...}| \erratum{page 101} This is not an error, but some readers will find it helpful if, in the descriptions of \verb|\setlength| and \verb|\addtolength|, -\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|. +\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|. \reportedby{Ellen Gilkerson}{9 Aug 1994} \erratum{page 108, lines 7 and 10} @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Change ``\verb|\resettime|'' to ``\verb|\settime|''. \erratum{page 84, after line $11$} Add the following sentence: ``The \hbox{\verb|\onlyslides|} and \hbox{\verb|\onlynotes|} commands may not work right if a \texttt{slide}, \texttt{overlay}, or \texttt{note} -environment appears in the argument of any command.'' +environment appears in the argument of any command.'' \reportedby{Eike Ritter}{May 1996} \erratum{page 153, line 1} @@ -163,11 +163,11 @@ Add ``or subentry'' after ``entry''. Add the following before line $-4$: \begin{description} \item[\mytt \bs columnwidth] -Normal width +Normal width \cindex{columnwidth}% of a column; -% \index{column!width}% - \index{width!of column}% +% \index{column!width}% + \index{width!of column}% equals \verb|\textwidth| except for multiple-column styles. Its value should not be changed with the length-setting commands. \end{description} @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Also, in line $-4$, change \verb|\textwidth| to \verb|\columnwidth|. %\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmav}{20 Jan 1995} \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{9 Sep 1994} -\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19} +\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19} % Replace these five lines (which begin ``These commands are overridden'') with: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ command immediately after the sectioning command. \end{itemize} \reportedby{Jerome Breitenbach}{14 Dec 1995} -\erratum{page 182} +\erratum{page 182} The dimensions \verb|\pageheight| and \verb|\pagewidth| should be \verb|\paperheight| and \verb|\paperwidth|, @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ These declarations may not be used in math mode. Replace lines 16-19 (beginning ``None of these commands'') with \begin{quote} When these commands are used in math mode, the \emph{text} -argument is processed in LR mode. +argument is processed in LR mode. These commands and declarations are robust. Words typeset in typewriter style are not hyphenated except where permitted by \verb|\-| @@ -253,21 +253,21 @@ Change ``through a symbol'' by ``through a relation symbol''. \erratum{page 137} This is not an error, but it would be better to change lines 23 and 24 to: \begin{quote} -\LaTeX\ +\LaTeX\ \index{file!not found error}% \index{file!nonexistent}% is trying to read a file that apparently doesn't exist. If the missing file has the extension \texttt{tex}, then \LaTeX\ is trying to \index{input)@\verb+\input+!of nonexistent file}% \index{include)@\verb+\include+!of nonexistent file}% -\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it +\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it \end{quote} \erratum{page 171, line 19} Change the description of \verb|\indent| to: \begin{description} \item[\mytt \bs indent] -Produces a +Produces a % \cindex{indent}% % \index{paragraph!indentation}% horizontal space whose width equals the width of the @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ try typing \verb|\indent\indent|.) Robust. \erratum{page 179, line 19} % -Change to: +Change to: \begin{quote} page style for the \texttt{article} and \texttt{report} document classes. \end{quote} @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ with ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_2$ are numbers''. \erratum{page 196, line $-5$} Change \verb|\newboolean{|\emph{name}\verb|}| to -\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|. +\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|. \reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000} @@ -321,14 +321,14 @@ Add a space after ``bibliography''. \reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003} \subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-First Printing} -\erratum{page 198, line $-11$} +\erratum{page 198, line $-11$} The sentence beginning ``The last three rules'' is hard to read. Better would be: \begin{quote} -\noindent The last three rules are suspended when a +\noindent The last three rules are suspended when a \verb|\clearpage|,\linebreak \verb|\cleardoublepage|, or - \verb|\end{document}| command occurs, + \verb|\end{document}| command occurs, at which point all unprocessed figures and tables are allowed a \hbox{\mytt p} option and printed. \end{quote} @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ at which point all unprocessed figures and tables are allowed a \subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-Second Printing} -\erratum{page 253, column 2, lines $-5$ and $-6$} +\erratum{page 253, column 2, lines $-5$ and $-6$} The two index entries for \verb|\ldots| should be combined. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.pdf Binary files differindex e82c1c703d2..300cbb509b6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf Binary files differindex ca01f18bc02..5a61078bd39 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex index ff796c76879..33af973d29b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex @@ -1,35 +1,35 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: modguide.tex \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] - + \documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] \newcommand{\reasonsection}[1]{\subsubsection*{\it #1}} @@ -39,16 +39,16 @@ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} \title{Modifying \LaTeX} - + \author{\copyright~Copyright 1995, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.} - + \date{12 December 1995} - + \begin{document} - + \maketitle - + \tableofcontents \begin{abstract} @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ and wide-ranging uses of the \LaTeX{} system. \item The packages that we maintain define a particular document interface and, in some cases, particular formatting of parts of a - document. - + document. + \item The interfaces between different parts of the \LaTeX{} system are very complex and it is therefore very difficult to check that a change to one file does not affect the functionality of both that @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ line: \begin{verbatim} \usepackage{array}[1994/10/16] \end{verbatim} - + By supplying the optional argument, the document author is indicating that a version of the file \texttt{array.sty} dated no earlier than that date is required to run this document without error. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ of a later date, but without the new feature. If the document were processed using this `alternative array' then it would certainly produce `undefined command' errors and would probably not be processable at all. - + \reasonsection{What's in a file-name?} \label{sec:jb} @@ -273,13 +273,13 @@ of the system's many advantages. The simplest way to achieve this is to replace \begin{quote} \verb|\documentclass{article}|\quad by\quad -\verb|\documentclass{myart}| +\verb|\documentclass{myart}| \end{quote} Nor do we wish to discourage the production of new packages improving on the functionality or implementation of those we distribute. All we ask is that, in the best interests of all \LaTeX{} users, you give -your superbly improved class or package file some other name. +your superbly improved class or package file some other name. \section{Configuration possibilities} \label{sec:conposs} @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following. \item Ensure that it contains no file with a name the same as that of a file in the standard distribution but with different contents. - (If this is not possible then you must: + (If this is not possible then you must: \begin{itemize} \item ensure that files from the non-\LaTeX{} system cannot be @@ -375,14 +375,14 @@ from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following. whatever means is appropriate. \item Ensure that what is written at the beginning of the log file - clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is + clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is not Standard \LaTeX{}. See the file \texttt{cfgguide.tex} for how to achieve this. \item - Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your + Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your system should not be sent to the maintainers of Standard - \LaTeX{}. + \LaTeX{}. \end{enumerate} \subsection*{Note to system administrators} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf Binary files differindex 1fddfe7ab76..ceac939603e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/proc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/proc.pdf Binary files differindex 78e94ce21b2..199682309cd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/proc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/proc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slides.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slides.pdf Binary files differindex c82a7d3ec5a..69138ef85f7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slides.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slides.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slifonts.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slifonts.pdf Binary files differindex bd5aa88b1c3..adc386391d0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slifonts.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/slifonts.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.pdf Binary files differindex 87ea56a73bf..8efc4702647 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex index d34dabfa476..ccb19a8b2e7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document. @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ % % Some notes on processing this document are contained at the end % of this document, after \end{document} -% +% % DPC 1997/11/17 % % First a special index style for makeindex @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ page_precedence "rnaA" \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} % Needed for documentation in ltoutenc.dtx -\usepackage{textcomp} +% \usepackage{textcomp} \begin{document} \title{The \LaTeXe\ Sources} @@ -266,6 +266,8 @@ page_precedence "rnaA" \DocInclude{ltfssbas} % NFSS Base macros + \DocInclude{ltfssaxes}% NFSS Axes handling (new in 2020) + \DocInclude{ltfsstrc} % NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty) \DocInclude{ltfsscmp} % NFSS1 Compatibility @@ -279,7 +281,9 @@ page_precedence "rnaA" \DocInclude{preload} % preload.ltx \DocInclude{ltfntcmd} % \textrm etc - + + \DocInclude{lttextcomp} % companion symbols (new 2020) + \DocInclude{ltpageno} % Page numbering \DocInclude{ltxref} % Cross referencing @@ -405,7 +409,7 @@ or whatever... rm -f source2e.gls source2e.ind source2e.toc -# First run: +# First run: # Create new standard ltxdoc.cfg file # Pass the (possibly empty) list of arguments supplied on the # command line to article class. @@ -452,7 +456,7 @@ pdflatex source2e.tex # Running this script will process all the dtx fdd and *guide.tex # and ltnews*.tex files in the LaTeX distribution, except the dtx -# files included in source2e.tex. +# files included in source2e.tex. # (The shell first script in the comments of source2e.tex will # process those.) @@ -485,7 +489,7 @@ then echo In source2e: $i else echo pdflatex $i - if (pdflatex $i > /dev/null) + if (pdflatex $i > /dev/null) then echo pdflatex $i pdflatex $i > /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/syntonly.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/syntonly.pdf Binary files differindex 5504fb61177..98986d5010b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/syntonly.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/syntonly.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt index 9380a677fef..8215f952a7d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt @@ -1,34 +1,34 @@ LaTeX installation TeX expert information - + 1 June 1997 - - + + SUMMARY ======= - -This document contains information about the LaTeX installation for + +This document contains information about the LaTeX installation for TeX experts. In particular it describes: - + * The checks performed by ltxcheck.tex - + * How to print the LaTeX source. - + For more general information, see install.txt. - -For information on configuring LaTeX see cfgguide.tex. + +For information on configuring LaTeX see cfgguide.tex. THE LTXCHECK.TEX CHECKS ======================= - + Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. - + 1) The \@currdir check. It is useful for LaTeX to know the syntax for the `current directory (or folder)', or `default directory', if the operating system has such a concept. - + For example, file abc.tex in this directory, or folder, is specified by: ./abc.tex on Unix and most DOS/OS2 TeX's, @@ -38,10 +38,10 @@ Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. installation. However, if none of these syntaxes works on your system then the internal macro \@currdir will be set to be empty and ltxcheck will report this. - + If your system does have a notion of a current directory, you can define \@currdir in the file texsys.cfg. - + You could also report this to the latex-bug address, so that later releases can automatically cope with your system. @@ -63,19 +63,19 @@ Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. name, including the directory. On these systems LaTeX needs to be given a list of directories in which to look for files; the internal macro \input@path holds this information. - + When run, ltxcheck will try to locate the file article.cls. If it fails to find this file (and you have placed it in the `standard input directory') then you must define \input@path in the file texsys.cfg. - + The files texsys.cfg and ltdirchk.dtx contain examples of how to do this but only you know the directories and syntax that should be used for your installation. - + We hope to build up a better collection of examples in future releases of LaTeX, as it is tested on more TeX systems. - + 4) TeX version check. The next check tests that you are running a recent version of TeX. @@ -85,12 +85,12 @@ Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. not be able to use the new (8-bit) font families that are now available. If you must stick with TeX2, please read the extra information in the file tex2.txt. - + If ltxcheck reports that your TeX version is older than 3.141, you will see some strange messages during the installation. This is because earlier versions of TeX printed certain line-breaks in messages on the terminal as `^^J' rather than starting a new line. - + LaTeX will work round this bug and thus avoid `^^J' appearing in error messages, but you should upgrade your TeX as soon as possible, as other bugs have been fixed, not just line breaks in @@ -111,11 +111,11 @@ Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. b) The `extra Computer Modern' fonts. The American Mathematical Society has extended the range of sizes available in the Computer Modern fonts. LaTeX now assumes that these extra cm - fonts are available. + fonts are available. The fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory ctan:macros/latex/fonts or alternatively as part of the AMS fonts collection, which also includes many useful - mathematical fonts. + mathematical fonts. c) The `T1 encoded Computer Modern' fonts. This is the ec or dc font collection. The new (1995) release 1.2 of the dc fonts changed most of the file names. For this reason the fd files such as @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. newdc.ins (version 1.2 and 1.3). As the T1 fd files will have been used when making the format, you must re-run initex latex.ltx to remake the format if you - update the fd files in this way. + update the fd files in this way. Running ltxcheck will produce a ! BAD LaTeX2e system!! error message if it detects that the `new' fd files are loaded into the format, but only the old dc fonts are available, and vice @@ -159,21 +159,21 @@ on it. The file source2e.tex is a master file which produces the documented code for the whole LaTeX kernel (but not the standard packages, classes, or compatibility mode). You need to have LaTeX2e installed before doing this. - -To configure the appearance of this documentation, you can use a -ltxdoc.cfg file. For example, putting the following line into this + +To configure the appearance of this documentation, you can use a +ltxdoc.cfg file. For example, putting the following line into this file will format the documentation for A4 paper: - + \PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article} - + The doc package, which is used by the documentation files, writes index files and change-history files that can be processed by the program MakeIndex. If this program is part of your TeX installation, you can get an index and history listing for a documentation file by running the .idx and .glo files through this program. - + For example, in Unix MakeIndex, you should say: - + makeindex -s gind.ist FILENAME makeindex -s gglo.ist -o FILENAME.gls FILENAME.glo @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Running makeindex will produce some warning messages about ignored style specifiers; these can be safely ignored. See the comments at the end of source2e.tex for more information. - + CONFIGURING LaTeX ================= @@ -206,5 +206,5 @@ You will find further information about various aspects of LaTeX in the distributed files with names <*>guide.tex. You will need to install the new version before you can typeset these files. - + --- Copyright 1995-2019 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.err index 57b3c857153..7f4e2817c80 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.err +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.err @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ \begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} %% %% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach -%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; %% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl % % @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ % Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting % % hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for -% errata files of other books. +% errata files of other books. % % Changes: % @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ % some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: -\let\u\underline +\let\u\underline \renewcommand\>{$\to$} %%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ \def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% %%% also count secondary: -%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% } \renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp } - + \renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil \endgobble @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ } \renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% - \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} \end{filecontents} @@ -242,12 +242,12 @@ \begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} % % -% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% Configuration file for the errata listing of % % The LaTeX Companion, Second Edition % % -% \erratastartdate +% \erratastartdate % % Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. % @@ -269,8 +269,8 @@ % listing. % % The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th -% printing are typeset. -% +% printing are typeset. +% % \renewcommand\myprinting{1} @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}. \end{center} Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book. -For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 +For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice will be made between all those with the largest number of findings). @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers). As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or -multiple errors. --- +multiple errors. --- Good luck! \begin{center} @@ -402,9 +402,9 @@ Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential for correctly understanding the book contents. - -\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{} - + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{} + Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book to book depending on how the paper was handled between print @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] -\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{} +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{} Slightly updated examples matching the second printing will be made available at CTAN: \texttt{info/examples/tlc2}. The book CD will have the original examples from the first printing. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] Each time a space is missing between package names in parentheses. \erroronpage{xxvii}{para 1, l.-2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} - Add: ``Thorsten Hansen (\textsf{bibunits}\u{, \textsf{multibib}}) + Add: ``Thorsten Hansen (\textsf{bibunits}\u{, \textsf{multibib}}) \erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{NBe}{2004/04/23}{2} Replace ``Wai Wing'' with ``Wai Wong'' (very sorry for this typo). @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] \erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{MHCL/CAR}{2004/06/09}{2} Kai Tek airport is correctly named Kai Tak airport but the photo was actually taken at Hong Kong International Airport - + \erroronpage{xxvii}{after para 4}{FMi}{2004/06/09}{2} Add following paragraph: ``Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ the standard classes (file \texttt{classes.dtx}).'' \thesection\par \centering#2\par}% % and number \@afterheading % prepare indentation handling \sectionmark{#1}% % add to running header - \addvspace{\baselineskip}} % space after heading + \addvspace{\baselineskip}} % space after heading \newcommand\sAppendix[1]{% % Simplified (starred) form {\raggedleft\large\bfseries\appendixname\par \centering#1\par}% @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ the standard classes (file \texttt{classes.dtx}).'' % not really a bug but ... \erroronpage{35}{para 1}{hajk}{2005/09/29}{} - Package fncychap also makes unwanted ``Chapter 0'' heading for + Package fncychap also makes unwanted ``Chapter 0'' heading for |\chapter{Preface}| in |\frontmatter| of book. Comment: I don't really consider this a bug (as it is not surprising @@ -669,14 +669,14 @@ the standard classes (file \texttt{classes.dtx}).'' The lines of the ``heading text'' are wrapped at a place different from that indicated by the \verb=|<- \@tocrmarg ->|=. -\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of +\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of \texttt{\textbackslash @pnumwidth}}{CBa}{2005/04/04}{4} Needs changing with |\renewcommand|! -\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of +\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of \texttt{\textbackslash @tocrmarg}}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/20}{2} - Add additional sentence: + Add additional sentence: ``It can be set to a rubber length, which results in the TOC being set unjustified.'' @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Remove: ``\ldots are limited to three characters, like MS-DOS \u{or Windows}.'' \erroronpage{58}{exa 2-3-8}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} km2 appears two times in the code and in the printed output; - it should be \verb=km\textsuperscript={2} in the code + it should be \verb=km\textsuperscript={2} in the code and km\textsuperscript{2} in the output. \erroronpage{62}{l.-11}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ Remove: ``\ldots are limited to three characters, like MS-DOS \u{or Windows}.'' \erroronpage{75}{para -1, l.2}{CKr}{2004/10/17}{4} Change: ``provided the \textit{keys}'' \> - ``provided the \textit{key}\u{s}'' + ``provided the \textit{key}\u{s}'' \seriouserroronpage{76}{para -2, l.5--8}{DAr/FMi}{2004/07/24}{2} Change marginal to ``{\itshape Unnumbered sections get moving @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ moving arguments, \ldots'' Add: ``In addition, no \u{unrelated} |\addcontentsline| command is allowed to intervene between heading and label.'' -\erroronpage{78}{\S 2.4.5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} +\erroronpage{78}{\S 2.4.5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} Add: ``Sebastian Rahtz \u{(with contributions by Heiko Oberdiek and David Carlisle)} has developed\ldots'' @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ allowed to intervene between heading and label.'' \erroronpage{84}{}{DAr}{2004/07/23}{2} Change: ``For example, if the current size is \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash Large} then -\verb=\relsize{-2}= would change to \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash normalsize}\,. +\verb=\relsize{-2}= would change to \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash normalsize}\,. \seriouserroronpage{84}{exa 3-1-7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} To avoid extra space in the output, second line should read:\\ @@ -791,9 +791,9 @@ Change: ``For example, if the current size is \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash Large} \erroronpage{87}{exa. 3-1-16}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2} The solid band produced by |\xout| is actually supposed to come - out as a series of separated ``/'' symbols. With the + out as a series of separated ``/'' symbols. With the \texttt{ulem} package used for the first printing that works well - for most text fonts, but + for most text fonts, but with Times Roman (used in the example) you get the result shown. The new package version fixes this defect. @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ highlighting color\u{ as demonstrated below}: \erroronpage{117}{para 3, l.3}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2} Tense correction: ``\ldots they did not change when the text font - \u{was} modified''. + \u{was} modified''. \erroronpage{117}{para 3,l.-3}{FMi}{2004/05/31}{2} Change: ``your list consist of'' \> ``your list\u{s} consist of''. @@ -874,11 +874,11 @@ highlighting color\u{ as demonstrated below}: \erroronpage{124}{middle para, ll. -3/-2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} Missing word: ``It is even possible \u{to} use \ldots'' -\iffalse +\iffalse %% only do if real error on page \erroronpage{125}{para 3 of \S 3.2.7, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{} Word position: ``\ldots\ whenever |\endnote| or |\endnotemark| - \u{is used} without an optional argument.'' + \u{is used} without an optional argument.'' \fi \erroronpage{127}{para 3, l.last}{PYu}{2004/07/01}{2} @@ -941,11 +941,11 @@ similar after the |\\| to prevent an underfull hbox-warning. \erroronpage{156}{para -1, l.4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} Change: ``There is also the possibility to operate'' \> ``It is also - possible to operate''. + possible to operate''. \erroronpage{157}{para 2, l.-4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} Change: ``\ldots discussed below) are potentially'' \> ``\ldots - discussed below) \u{is} potentially''. + discussed below) \u{is} potentially''. \erroronpage{158}{para3, l.3}{DHL/FMi}{2004/06/07}{2} Change word: ``tiny white rules \u{behind} the lines'' \> ``tiny white @@ -1042,11 +1042,11 @@ similar after the |\\| to prevent an underfull hbox-warning. \CHAPTER{Chapter 4} \erroronpage{196}{table 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{} - The values shown in the table aren't any quite correct. These days - some of them are calculated depending on the chosen paper size option + The values shown in the table aren't any quite correct. These days + some of them are calculated depending on the chosen paper size option and so have slightly different values from what is listed in the table. The values listed are those that have been used in 2.09 (i.e., they - would be fully correct in compatibility mode, that is for documents + would be fully correct in compatibility mode, that is for documents starting with |\documentstyle|). \erroronpage{199}{code block}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} @@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ similar after the |\\| to prevent an underfull hbox-warning. \erroronpage{205}{para 4, l.4}{CAR}{2004/06/06}{2} Delete word: ``\ldots taken up by the binding\u{ method}. For - example,\ldots'' + example,\ldots'' \erroronpage{205}{para 5, l.2}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} Omitted word: ``one can \u{perform} the parameter calculations''. @@ -1099,7 +1099,7 @@ Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}='' \erroronpage{209}{para 1, l.1--2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} Replace: ``\ldots and does not leave sufficient space for marginal notes - that fall outside the page.'' + that fall outside the page.'' \> ``\ldots but does not adjust the size of the marginal boxes to fit in the remaining margin.'' @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}='' ``Table~9.2 on page~547 in Section~\u{9.2.1}'' (or omit section refence completely) -\erroronpage{223}{tab 4.3}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} +\erroronpage{223}{tab 4.3}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} Spurious space after superscript \textsuperscript{a} in footnote. \erroronpage{226}{para. 5, l.2}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2} @@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}='' \erroronpage{229}{2.-1}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2} Change: ``if the first B-head\ldots would have already been'' \> ``if - the first B-head\ldots had already been''. + the first B-head\ldots had already been''. \erroronpage{229}{para -2,l.-2}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} Replace: @@ -1192,13 +1192,13 @@ Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}='' \seriouserroronpage{234}{First boxed command}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2} Change: ``\verb=\enlargethispage*{=size\verb=}='' \> - ``\verb=\enlargethispage{=size\verb=}=''. + ``\verb=\enlargethispage{=size\verb=}=''. \erroronpage{237}{para 1, l.3}{MKo}{2004/08/06}{2} Change: ``\textsf{scrpage}'' \> ``\textsf{scrpage2}'' \erroronpage{237}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/01/11}{4} - Change: ``also works as \u{an} replacement'' \> ``also works as + Change: ``also works as \u{an} replacement'' \> ``also works as \u{a} replacement'' \erroronpage{237}{para 5, l.2}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} @@ -1220,7 +1220,7 @@ the \verb|\kill| command. \erroronpage{242}{para -2}{DSch/FMi}{2005/09/19}{4} Replace para with: ``The \texttt{tabular*} environment has an additional width argument that -specifies the required total width of the table. +specifies the required total width of the table. It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using |\extracolsep| (see page~246).'' @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using environments. If all the cells of the row are smaller than the strut the effect is more or less similar to an enlargement of the inter-row space, while if at least one cell in the row is larger than the strut no spreading apart takes - place other than that required by the largest cell. + place other than that required by the largest cell. @@ -1258,7 +1258,7 @@ It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using Replace: ``the sum of its value, added to the product |\baselineskip|${}\times{}$|\arraystretch}|'' - \> + \> `` $|\arraystretch| \times (|\extrarowheight| + 0.7 |\baselineskip|)$'' @@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using Replace para with: ``A common use of |@{}| is to remove the space equal to the value of |\tabcolsep| (for \texttt{tabular}) that, by default, -appears on each side of the table, +appears on each side of the table, except when the column specification starts or ends in a \verb=|=.'' @@ -1354,7 +1354,7 @@ Replace with: ``We then continue by explaining how you can define and use your own floating environments (Section~6.3.1), or, conversely, how captioning commands can be used to enter information into the list of figures and tables for nonfloating - material (Section~6.3.2). + material (Section~6.3.2). Then methods for rotating the content of a float are described (Section~6.3.3). @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ Replace with: ``We then continue by \erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{FMi}{2005/02/13}{4} Use typewriter: ``the default is \texttt{12pt} - \texttt{plus} \texttt{2pt} \u{\texttt{minus}} + \texttt{plus} \texttt{2pt} \u{\texttt{minus}} \texttt{2pt} for 10\,pt'' \erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{HjG}{2005/02/06}{4} @@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ Replace with: ``We then continue by ``However, by itself this option forces all floats to appear \emph{before} the next section material is typeset, since the |\FloatBarrier| prevents a float from a current - section from appearing below + section from appearing below the start of the new section, even if some material of the current section is present on the same page. '' @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ The Runaway error may be explained in a better way: the \fi \erroronpage{309}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4} - Missing comma: ``\ldots you will get a typical ``standard \LaTeX'' + Missing comma: ``\ldots you will get a typical ``standard \LaTeX'' format\u{,} that is, \ldots'' \erroronpage{312}{\texttt{position} option}{JS/FMi}{2005/09/14}{4} @@ -1480,7 +1480,7 @@ The Runaway error may be explained in a better way: the \erroronpage{312}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4} Word in wrong position: ``for example, ``above'' the caption if - caption is \u{the} placed at the bottom.'' + caption is \u{the} placed at the bottom.'' \> ``for example, ``above'' the caption if \u{the} caption is \ldots'' @@ -1508,9 +1508,9 @@ Remove: ``approach is to \u{to} specify\ldots'' \CHAPTER{Chapter 7} -\erroronpage{332}{para -2,l.2}{THa}{2004/07/21}{2} +\erroronpage{332}{para -2,l.2}{THa}{2004/07/21}{2} SinCE SEriFS arE noT alwayS horizonTaL: ``Serifs are the tiny - horizontal strokes\dots'' \> ``Serifs are the tiny strokes\dots'' + horizontal strokes\dots'' \> ``Serifs are the tiny strokes\dots'' \erroronpage{338}{para -1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} Missing word: ``command \u{and} declarative forms'' @@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ Modern Typewriter. Missing space between ``m,'' and ``bx'' in the middle column. \erroronpage{391}{tab. 7.15}{FMi}{2004/07/09}{2} - Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too + Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too wide (printing problem). \erroronpage{391}{tab 7.15, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} @@ -1723,7 +1723,7 @@ Modern Typewriter. ``local guide''; I believe this is an obsolete concept, dating back to the times when \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ were used on multitasking mainframes; commercial distributions might still have a ``local guide'', but I have never - seen one. + seen one. \erroronpage{414}{footnote}{hv}{2008/10/30}{} @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ These days the package |pst-char| has been integrated into |pst-text|. \erroronpage{428}{item 6}{CKr}{2005/01/18}{4} Replace: ``Specified the quad width'' \> ``Specifie\u{s} the quad - width'' + width'' \erroronpage{432}{para 4, l.9}{HjG}{2004/07/11}{2} Not plural: ``\ldots: the outer text size\u{s} and the three math @@ -1783,7 +1783,7 @@ These days the package |pst-char| has been integrated into |pst-text|. ``\u{a}nd are usually placed in an \texttt{.fd} file.'' \erroronpage{441}{para 5, l.1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} - Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 \erroronpage{442}{footnote, l.2}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} Sentence begins with lowercase 's'. @@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ produce a straight double quote, i.e., ")'' \u{such a} way that \ldots'' \erroronpage{444}{para 2, l.4}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} - Missing word: ``\ldots associates the number 224 \u{with} the + Missing word: ``\ldots associates the number 224 \u{with} the command |\alpha|.'' \erroronpage{445}{para 4, ll.3--5}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} @@ -1814,14 +1814,14 @@ command |\alpha|.'' math glyph---comprehensible? \erroronpage{447}{Heading}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} - Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 \erroronpage{451}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} Wrong number: ``\texttt{\u{'240}} octal'' \> ``\texttt{\u{'344}} octal'' \erroronpage{453}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} - Missing word : ``\ldots an \emph{LICR-object} that is \u{to} be + Missing word : ``\ldots an \emph{LICR-object} that is \u{to} be used whenever\ldots'' \erroronpage{455}{para 3, l.-1}{JCh}{2004/07/17}{2} @@ -1833,13 +1833,13 @@ used whenever\ldots'' |\OE| $\leftrightarrow$ |\O| -- cf.\ |\o| and |\oe| on p.459 \erroronpage{457}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} - Entry |\`i|: ``(\u{avail})'' \> ``(\u{alias})'' + Entry |\`i|: ``(\u{avail})'' \> ``(\u{alias})'' \erroronpage{458}{\texttt{\string\copyright}}{FMi/usw}{2005/01/11}{4} Natively available in LY1 encoding \seriouserroronpage{458}{l. 27--30}{JLV}{2005/05/31}{4} - Unfortunately |\guillemotleft|, |\guillemotright|, |\guilsinglleft|, and + Unfortunately |\guillemotleft|, |\guillemotright|, |\guilsinglleft|, and |\guilsinglright| have no ``default'' and only function in |OT1| if \textsf{babel} is loaded @@ -1898,7 +1898,7 @@ used whenever\ldots'' \erroronpage{463}{para 1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2} Change: ``\ldots integrated in \u{1993})'' \> - ``\ldots integrated in \u{1994})'' + ``\ldots integrated in \u{1994})'' \CHAPTER{Chapter 8} @@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ Poor Maxwell's equations! No doubt there are mathematical \erroronpage{500}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. \fi - + \erroronpage{501}{exa 8-6-4}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} Surplus word (in source comment):\\ ``\texttt{\% the old \u{the} definition of \textbackslash csc}'' @@ -2120,7 +2120,7 @@ Poor Maxwell's equations! No doubt there are mathematical The |fleqn| option is used, but in the output, the two equations seem to be right aligned rather than left aligned!\\ Indeed true: this is because in \textsf{amsmath} the |\mathindent| - added on the left is + added on the left is actually a rubber length (see page 471) that is automatically shortend if there is not enough space. @@ -2155,7 +2155,7 @@ Change: ``The unaccented ASCII Latin letters and Arabic Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. \fi - \erroronpage{527}{table 8.10}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2} + \erroronpage{527}{table 8.10}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2} This table would be better if reordered, in particular so that the first row contains: \verb=\aleph \beth \gimmel \daleth=. This would @@ -2165,7 +2165,7 @@ Change: ``The unaccented ASCII Latin letters and Arabic \erroronpage{527,528}{table 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{s} Added the missing symbol from amssymb: |\circledR|, |\yen|, - |\checkmark|, and |\maltese|. + |\checkmark|, and |\maltese|. The general distribution of symbols between the two tables is a bit questionable, but this will stay as it is. @@ -2176,7 +2176,7 @@ Change: ``The unaccented ASCII Latin letters and Arabic \erroronpage{528}{table 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{} |\dag| and |\ddag| are |\mathord|s not |\mathbin| as claimed in table - 8.13. + 8.13. \seriouserroronpage{529}{table 8.12, l.3}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} @@ -2281,12 +2281,12 @@ Plural: ``Clearly, 8 bits \u{are} not sufficient\ldots'' newzealand})'' Add footnote: ``\textit{The option \texttt{\upshape english} - combines American hyphenation patterns - with a British date format.}'' + combines American hyphenation patterns + with a British date format.}'' \erroronpage{545}{exa 9-2-1}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4} - The quotes surrounding R\'ef\'erences and Chapitre + The quotes surrounding R\'ef\'erences and Chapitre should be the french ones: use |\og| and |\fg{}|. And similar those around German words should use |"`| and |"'|. @@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ to show the differences between |"-|, |\-|, and no hyphen. and ``|~N~|\meta{letter}'' \> ``|~N|'' \erroronpage{554}{exa 9-3-11}{UFi/MGo}{2004/06/03}{2} - Replace body with: + Replace body with: ``|En fran\c{c}ais on doit mettre un \fg petit espace\fg\| |devant la ponctuation double: comme cela!| \ldots'' @@ -2541,8 +2541,8 @@ The line:\\ Replace ``\textsf{bang}'' with ``\textsf{bengali}''. This package is available on CTAN in the \textsf{languages/bengali/pandey}. -\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.4 }{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2} - Replace ``\textsf{denag}'' with ``\textsf{devnag}''. +\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.4 }{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2} + Replace ``\textsf{denag}'' with ``\textsf{devnag}''. This package is on CTAN \texttt{languages/devanagari/velthuis}. \erroronpage{592}{para 5, l.1}{CKr}{2004/10/15}{4} @@ -2550,7 +2550,7 @@ The line:\\ \erroronpage{592}{general remarks}{PPn}{2004/05/25}{} Additional remarks not for inclusion in the book: For \TeX{}, \LaTeX{} -in languages of India, +in languages of India, there are several nice packages. An overview can be found in the following {\sc TUGboat} Articles; @@ -2731,7 +2731,7 @@ some of the listed drivers are only of historical interest. \erroronpage{620}{para 5, l.2}{FMi}{2005/04/27}{4} Replace: ``\ldots in the \u{optional arguments}.'' \> - ``\ldots in the \textit{key/val-list}.'' + ``\ldots in the \textit{key/val-list}.'' %\erroronpage{621}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} % Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. @@ -2803,7 +2803,7 @@ some of the listed drivers are only of historical interest. The variable parts do not show the right fonts. \erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.1}{ReSt}{2005/04/17}{4} - Remove: ``The |\Curve| command\u{s} is similar\ldots'' + Remove: ``The |\Curve| command\u{s} is similar\ldots'' \erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} Second occurrence of mandatory argument should use the same font as @@ -2830,7 +2830,7 @@ some of the listed drivers are only of historical interest. \erroronpage{643}{para 4, l.5}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} Add: ``\ldots can be converted to PDF by ImageMagick's \texttt{convert} utility\u{, \texttt{eps2pdf}} (\u{both -of} which call \texttt{ghostscript} +of} which call \texttt{ghostscript} internally), \texttt{Acrobat Distiller}, or\ldots'' \erroronpage{646}{l.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/08}{2} @@ -2853,7 +2853,7 @@ page several output files are generated.)'' \seriouserroronpage{654}{para 2 l.7}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} Missing |}|: ``like |\index{\texttt{|\emph{key}|}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}} and'' - + %That's a nice one: somehow the copy-editor has but the output is one @@ -2895,7 +2895,7 @@ The source has now been edited to match the printed output. \erroronpage{656}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{s} - How horrible the page rotated counterclockwise! + How horrible the page rotated counterclockwise! \erroronpage{657}{\texttt{-p} item, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} Add word: ``\ldots the three \u{special} cases \ldots'' @@ -2904,7 +2904,7 @@ The source has now been edited to match the printed output. Swap the words ``single'' and ``double'' \iffalse -% not a bug make it look nicer +% not a bug make it look nicer \erroronpage{661}{tab. 11.2, right col.}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{} Inter-line spacing in multiple-line entries ???\\(Keywords: |headings_flag|, |item_x1|, |delim_0|, |page_precedence|) @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ page 666 changed to reflect rnaRA:\\ `` \ldots\ assumes that pages numbered with lowercase Roman numerals precede those numbered with Arabic numerals, which in turn precede those numbered with the lowercase alphabet, uppercase Roman -numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet. +numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet. \seriouserroronpage{661/664-5}{}{FMi}{2005/08/14}{4} @@ -2953,8 +2953,8 @@ numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet. \seriouserroronpage{666}{para 4 l.5 and l.6}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} - Add extra visual space in second index: ``Likewise, - \verb*=\index{a space}= and + Add extra visual space in second index: ``Likewise, + \verb*=\index{a space}= and \verb*=\index{a space}= produce\ldots'' \erroronpage{668}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} @@ -2979,15 +2979,15 @@ numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet. Section~11.3.4. Be aware that producing index entries in arguments of commands has - its own pitfalls, e.g., in - \verb=\command{Properties of \Prog\index{\Prog}}=. + its own pitfalls, e.g., in + \verb=\command{Properties of \Prog\index{\Prog}}=. Then \LaTeX{} commands might be expanded before they are written to the \texttt{idx} file and the placement in the index will depend on the expansion of \verb=\Prog=.'' \erroronpage{669}{para -2, l.3}{MKu/FMi}{2004/07/01}{2}% already done by fmi Add: ``\ldots \verb|\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}| to all her - documents \u{(or on recent Linux distributions the + documents \u{(or on recent Linux distributions the option \texttt{utf8})}, while\ldots'' \erroronpage{669}{section 11.3.2, para 2, L.3}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4} @@ -3055,7 +3055,7 @@ order to have the desired effect. \CHAPTER{Chapter 12} -\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{HVo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{} +\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{HVo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{} The German word ``Schuldrecht'' is incorrectly hyphenated as ``Schul\-drecht'' in several examples due to the fact that English hyphenation patterns are used unless the language is @@ -3144,7 +3144,7 @@ it may result in \u{a normal space,} some extra space\u, or in starting a new li Add: ``when using \u{the} \texttt{chicago} \u{\BibTeX\ style}.'' \seriouserroronpage{710}{para 4, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} - Replace: + Replace: ``locate the printed version.'' \> ``locate the article within the journal.'' @@ -3159,7 +3159,7 @@ Add word: ``If you \u{only} want to specify an \textit{annotator}, Extra word: ``the \u{the} journal'' \\ Correct explanation: ``\ldots the journal name\u{, volume number,} and year of publication, which is why we got ``TUGboat \u{10 - [}1989\u]''.'' + [}1989\u]''.'' \seriouserroronpage{719}{syntax box}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2} Order of optional arguments are like |\cite| (i.e., swapped):\\ @@ -3183,7 +3183,7 @@ Add word: ``If you \u{only} want to specify an \textit{annotator}, \seriouserroronpage{727}{para 3, l.-3}{JBe}{2004/06/01}{2} Replace: \texttt{\textbackslash jbnovarioref} \> - \texttt{\textbackslash jbignorevarioref} + \texttt{\textbackslash jbignorevarioref} \erroronpage{727}{examples 12-5-21/22}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2} Not wrong, but it looks funny: due to the chosen example height the @@ -3206,9 +3206,9 @@ Add word: ``If you \u{only} want to specify an \textit{annotator}, was changed to contain a slightly different set of citations (same change was made to example 12-5-27): \begin{verbatim} - Full citations: \cite{aschur} \cite{bschur} + Full citations: \cite{aschur} \cite{bschur} not shown on the left! -\newpage +\newpage text \cite[\S\,7]{aschur} text \cite[\S\,8]{aschur} \cite[\S\,16]{zpo} text \cite[\S\,7]{bschur} \cite{aschur} @@ -3220,7 +3220,7 @@ And the text above the example was changed as follows: explicitly), then the following happens: the first citation of a publication automatically displays the full entry (citation~5 in the next example). In case of repeated citations to unambiguous works -only the name of the author(s) are shown (citation~8). For ambiguous citations +only the name of the author(s) are shown (citation~8). For ambiguous citations this will be done only for immediately following citations (citation~4). However, if there are intervening citations, then the name(s) and short titles are shown @@ -3246,7 +3246,7 @@ Replace: ``in which case \u{the first} cross-reference \ldots'' \seriouserroronpage{743}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} Equal sign missing: \texttt{sortkey\u{ = }"Bismarck, Otto von"}. - + \erroronpage{744}{exa 12-5-48/49}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{} There's a spurious space before all occurrences of ``\textsc{D. E. Knuth}''! \\ This is (partly, ie in the footnote) @@ -3267,19 +3267,19 @@ Replace: ``in which case \u{the first} cross-reference \ldots'' Replace (`bibtopic' column, row 4; `multibib' column, row 7):\\ ``no'' \> ``No'' -\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} +\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} Change ``Requires tailored .bib files'' \> ``Works with standard - .bib files'' + .bib files'' (and change matching row entries) -\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} +\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} Change: ``Above typeset together somewhere'' \> ``Group bibliographies together'' -\erroronpage{749}{para -1, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} +\erroronpage{749}{para -1, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} Missing accents: ``Jose Alberto Fernandez'' \> ``Jos\'e Alberto - Fern\'andez'' - + Fern\'andez'' + \erroronpage{750}{para -3, l.-2}{CKr}{2005/03/31}{4} Delete surplus word: ``\ldots as \u{the} the auxiliary files would be overwritten.'' @@ -3291,7 +3291,7 @@ Replace: ``in which case \u{the first} cross-reference \ldots'' \erroronpage{753}{para 4, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} Replace: ``|\bibliography|'' \> ``|\bibliographystyle|'' -\seriouserroronpage{755/756}{}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} +\seriouserroronpage{755/756}{}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} Wrong limitation of multibib: The whole passage from ``A final difference'' up to ``|nocite|.'' should be replaced with something like: ``The multibib package (since version 2.3 of 2004/01/24) is @@ -3475,7 +3475,7 @@ under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' \texttt{apa.bst} -- add: ``American Psychology Association \u{\BibTeX\ style}'' \\ \texttt{jmb.bst} -- add: - ``\emph{Journal of Molecular Biology} \u{\BibTeX}\ style''\\ + ``\emph{Journal of Molecular Biology} \u{\BibTeX}\ style''\\ Some journal names are written in italic, other's aren't: Astronomy; Behavioral and Brain Sciences; Human Biology. @@ -3536,7 +3536,7 @@ under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' Remove surplus word: ``\ldots, then it is all that \u{it} is necessary.'' \erroronpage{800}{Citation scheme,l.2}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4} - Replace letter: ``\ldots different questions th\u{a}n if you + Replace letter: ``\ldots different questions th\u{a}n if you choose\ldots'' \erroronpage{802}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} @@ -3545,7 +3545,7 @@ under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' \erroronpage{802}{para -1, l.3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4} Replace wrong braces: ``|\urlprefix\url[|\textit{field-value}|]|'' \> - ``|\urlprefix\url{|\textit{field-value}|}|'' + ``|\urlprefix\url{|\textit{field-value}|}|'' \erroronpage{803}{para -2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} Replace: ``in the second phase of the \u{formatting}'' \> @@ -3572,7 +3572,7 @@ under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' Replace: ``at the beginning of this section'' \> ``on the facing page'' - + \CHAPTER{Chapter 14} @@ -3591,8 +3591,8 @@ under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' \erroronpage{816}{para -3, l.4+}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2} Change sentence: Note that \u{such short forms for \texttt{\textbackslash verb}, - just} like \texttt{\textbackslash verb} itself, - cannot appear in the argument of another command, but + just} like \texttt{\textbackslash verb} itself, + cannot appear in the argument of another command, but \u{the characters} may be used freely inside \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{macrocode} environments. @@ -3607,7 +3607,7 @@ asked for, and lines 1, \u{3}, and 4 otherwise.'' Entries not sorted correctly: swap |\CheckSum| and |\CheckModules| \seriouserroronpage{821}{descr.\ of - \ttfamily\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + \ttfamily\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} \verb=\MakeshortVerb= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb}\\ \verb=\MakeshortVerb*= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb*} @@ -3672,7 +3672,7 @@ asked for, and lines 1, \u{3}, and 4 otherwise.'' Editorial comment: reprinted because of pagebreak changes. \erroronpage{828}{para 3, l.2}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} - Extra word: ``If so, \u{case}'' \> ``If so,'' + Extra word: ``If so, \u{case}'' \> ``If so,'' \seriouserroronpage{829}{syntax box}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} |\preamble|, |\endpreamble|, |\postamble|, and |\endpostamble| all @@ -3723,7 +3723,7 @@ asked for, and lines 1, \u{3}, and 4 otherwise.'' Missing \texttt{*}: |\DeclareDir|\u{\texttt{*}}|{tex/bibtex/...| \erroronpage{832}{code blocks}{DPa}{2004/08/04}{2} - Three instances of |tex/bibtex| in |\DeclareDir| should lose the |tex/| to + Three instances of |tex/bibtex| in |\DeclareDir| should lose the |tex/| to conform to TDS and change made on page 831 \erroronpage{832}{2. code block}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{s} @@ -3814,7 +3814,7 @@ is not recognized as the start of a \texttt{figure*} environment}.'' \erroronpage{843}{para 3, l.2}{YvH}{2004/05/28}{2} - Missing word: ``and |\z@| contain |@| \u{in} their name'' + Missing word: ``and |\z@| contain |@| \u{in} their name'' \erroronpage{843}{para 4, l.3}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2} Change: ``to do: the difficult'' \> ``to do\u; the difficult'' @@ -3847,7 +3847,7 @@ Replace: ``An error is raised if the definitions differ, ldots'' \erroronpage{851}{para 5, l.-2}{FMi}{2004/07/20}{2} Add + change font: ``It also defines \u{the command} - |\the|\u{\textit{newctr}} to\ldots'' + |\the|\u{\textit{newctr}} to\ldots'' \erroronpage{852}{code block 1, l.2}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} Second \verb=\makeatletter= should be \verb=\makeatother= @@ -3868,7 +3868,7 @@ Change: \erroronpage{853}{l.6}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{2} - Missing space: ``c,\u{~}\dots, z'' + Missing space: ``c,\u{~}\dots, z'' \erroronpage{853}{para 4,ll.2+3}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2} Add word: ``\ldots definitions for sectioning \u{counters}'' @@ -3876,8 +3876,8 @@ Change: \erroronpage{853}{counter code block}{FMi}{2005/06/09}{4} The order of declarations of the counters is incorrect; they have to be \begin{verbatim} -\newcounter{part} -\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{part} +\newcounter{section} \newcounter{subsection}[section] \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] \end{verbatim} @@ -3892,14 +3892,14 @@ or you will receive a ``counter not defined'' error. \erroronpage{854}{ll. 1+2}{FMi}{2004/05/25}{2} Add word and commata: ``Only the representation\u{, prefix,} and - label field commands + label field commands are defined \ldots'' \seriouserroronpage{854}{code block 1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/25}{2} Replace with approx:\\[6pt] \hspace*{-140pt}\begin{minipage}[b]{\linewidth} \begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand\theenumi {\arabic{enumi}} \renewcommand\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} +\renewcommand\theenumi {\arabic{enumi}} \renewcommand\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} \renewcommand\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} \renewcommand\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} \end{verbatim} \begin{verbatim} @@ -3914,14 +3914,14 @@ Replace with approx:\\[6pt] \erroronpage{855}{fig A.1, l.4}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4} - Change ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' (no caret); and delete the -comma after inch + Change ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' (no caret); and delete the +comma after inch \erroronpage{855}{fig A.1}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2} Add: \texttt{ex} \quad Height of a small ``x'' in the current font \u{(approximately)} \\ -Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width +Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width of capital ``M'' in current font \u{(approximately)} @@ -3932,11 +3932,11 @@ Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width \erroronpage{856}{tab A.2, l.6}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2} Add: ``a \u{solid} horizontal line'' -\erroronpage{857}{table A.3}{V-Li}{2004/09/14}{4} +\erroronpage{857}{table A.3}{V-Li}{2004/09/14}{4} |\vspace{len}| is missing \erroronpage{858}{l.-8}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/26}{2} - Add: ``\u{missing or} misplaced |\item|'' + Add: ``\u{missing or} misplaced |\item|'' \erroronpage{858}{syntax box}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2} |\addvspace{|\textit{space}|}| should be typeset in a smaller font. @@ -3979,13 +3979,13 @@ Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width paragraph.} Editorial comment: change moves pagebreak. - + \seriouserroronpage{878}{codeline 4 (?)}{UFi}{2004/05/22}{2} |\usepackage[german]{varioref}[2001/09/0]:| day number is missing (test for version doesn't work then anymore!) \erroronpage{886}{fig.~A.1}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} - Add: \verb=\ProcessOptions= \u{\texttt{\char`\\relax}} + Add: \verb=\ProcessOptions= \u{\texttt{\char`\\relax}} (cf. hint on p.~882!) @@ -4003,7 +4003,7 @@ Missing letter: ``\verb=l.167 \par=\u{\texttt{t}}\verb={Text}='' Add: ``Technically, a moving argument is an argument that is internally expanded by \LaTeX{} without typesetting it directly\u{ (e.g.}, by using the internal \LaTeX{} construct - |\protected@edef|\textsuperscript{1}\u).'' + |\protected@edef|\textsuperscript{1}\u).'' \erroronpage{893}{para 2, l.8}{MHo/FMi}{2004/10/05}{4} Replace: @@ -4039,11 +4039,11 @@ bitmap images such as \texttt{.jpg}, \texttt{.gif}, and \texttt{.png} files.'' \erroronpage{899}{item 5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live'' - + \erroronpage{901}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live'' - + \seriouserroronpage{902}{l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} Missing letter: ``\texttt{\char`\\dis\u{c}retionary}'' @@ -4093,9 +4093,9 @@ processing your document with e\TeX{} and additionally load the \erroronpage{917}{footnote}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} Replace footnote with: ``In modern distributions \LaTeX{} is automatically - using the e\TeX{} program. On older installations you may have to + using the e\TeX{} program. On older installations you may have to call a different program (e.g., \texttt{elatex} instead of - \texttt{latex}) when processing a + \texttt{latex}) when processing a document.'' @@ -4179,7 +4179,7 @@ processing your document with e\TeX{} and additionally load the \erroronpage{938}{para -1, l.3}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/23}{2} Difficult to understand; replace: - ``\ldots a large \u{increase in} \texttt{t=} between'' + ``\ldots a large \u{increase in} \texttt{t=} between'' \erroronpage{939}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} Words need to be swapped: @@ -4319,13 +4319,13 @@ processing your document with e\TeX{} and additionally load the Missing word: ``for \LaTeX\ \u{and} a possible'' \erroronpage{980}{[151]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} - Remove: ``\LaTeX\u{Joachim Schrod}.'' + Remove: ``\LaTeX\u{Joachim Schrod}.'' \erroronpage{980}{[153]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} - Swap words: ``often are'' \> ``are often'' + Swap words: ``often are'' \> ``are often'' \erroronpage{980}{[155]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} - Missing word: ``For \u{the} \textsf{kuvio} system\ldots'' + Missing word: ``For \u{the} \textsf{kuvio} system\ldots'' \erroronpage{980}{[157]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} First line of online resources is not flush right (stray space?). @@ -4389,7 +4389,7 @@ and Correct range: author-date citations / history of (699, 700) \erroronpage{992}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s} - Correct: ``B\u{\'e}zier'' + Correct: ``B\u{\'e}zier'' \erroronpage{993}{}{SEg}{2005/04/26}{4} bibliographies/authors/name,formatting shows 798--1092 but should be @@ -4419,7 +4419,7 @@ and oblique (333) \erroronpage{1020}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4} - Replace ``fonts / URW Antigua'' \> ``fonts / URW Anti\u{q}ua'' + Replace ``fonts / URW Antigua'' \> ``fonts / URW Anti\u{q}ua'' \erroronpage{1034}{first col.}{FMi}{2004/05/15}{2} Add entry: ``lists / enumerated / user-defined, 151'' @@ -4429,18 +4429,18 @@ and \erroronpage{1041}{}{FMi}{2004/08/02}{2} ``\texttt{NACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' \> - ``\texttt{MACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' + ``\texttt{MACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' \erroronpage{1051}{secound col., l.14}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2} missing index entries for ``pdftex'' on p.7 and p.643 \erroronpage{1069}{}{FMi}{2004/11/07}{4} Replace: ``text symbols / setting-up'' \> - ``\u{math} symbols / setting-up'' + ``\u{math} symbols / setting-up'' \erroronpage{1076}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4} - Replace ``URW Antigua'' \> ``URW Anti\u{q}ua'' + Replace ``URW Antigua'' \> ``URW Anti\u{q}ua'' \CHAPTER{People} @@ -4449,9 +4449,9 @@ and Editorial comment: Needs manual breaking in index output file for second and fourth printing. -\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/06/22}{2} - Missing accents: ``Fernandez, Jose Alberto '' \> `Fern\'andez, Jos\'e Alberto'' - +\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/06/22}{2} + Missing accents: ``Fernandez, Jose Alberto '' \> `Fern\'andez, Jos\'e Alberto'' + \erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} Change page number in entry: ``Fukui, Rei, xxvii, 405, \u{969}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{968}'' @@ -4463,7 +4463,7 @@ and \erroronpage{1081}{col 2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} Change page number in entry: ``Hufflen, Jean-Michel, 761, \u{971}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{970}'' - + \erroronpage{1081}{}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2} Add page entries for ``Kettler, Howard'' and ``Frutiger, Adrian'' to ``People'' index back to 374. @@ -4506,7 +4506,7 @@ and \erroronpage{1089}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2004/07/21}{2} Add: ``\ldots this typographical icing \u{(package - \textsf{pdfcprot})} was\ldots'' + \textsf{pdfcprot})} was\ldots'' \erroronpage{1089}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} Missing period: \ldots files\u. It \ldots @@ -4626,5 +4626,3 @@ Here is an example: \end{verbatim} \end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.pdf Binary files differindex 3ab205c027d..adddbc55698 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tlc2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tulm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tulm.pdf Binary files differindex 1d142c925b7..75988b9206f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tulm.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tulm.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf Binary files differindex afe223cdb54..276b9a531b6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex index 08054168377..c76b27c0f08 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1993-2019 +% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 % The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere -% in this file. -% +% in this file. +% % This file is part of the LaTeX base system. % ------------------------------------------- -% +% % It may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c % of this license or (at your option) any later version. % The latest version of this license is in % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX % version 2008 or later. -% +% % This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% +% % The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is % given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional % information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% +% % \fi % Filename: usrguide.tex @@ -1298,21 +1298,21 @@ superscript position and in the correct size. \newcommand{\fauxguillemet}[1]{$\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}$} These commands produce various sorts of quotation mark. Rough representations of them are: - \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{} - \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet> - ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em`` + \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{} + \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet> + ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em`` ,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em` and |"|a|"|. \NEWdescription{2001/06/01} There are therefore some extra short-form ligatures available for use in documents that will only be used with |T1|-encoded fonts. - - The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|% - \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's - enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with - punctuation marks!} - can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase| - by typing |,,|\,. + + The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|% + \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's + enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with + punctuation marks!} + can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase| + by typing |,,|\,. Also, unlike the unexpected results with |OT1|-encoded fonts, |<<| and |>>| will produce \textless{} and diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf Binary files differindex 7f29e8f39c1..0fbfa6fa849 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err index f604d8ef35a..269636f9fb3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err @@ -235,15 +235,15 @@ \begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} % % -% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% Configuration file for the errata listing of % % The LaTeX Web Companion % % -% \erratastartdate +% \erratastartdate % % Specifies the date from which on -% errata entries should be listed. +% errata entries should be listed. % % The format is YYYY/MM/DD. % @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ % % Specifies which (revised) printing you % own. For example, if you have the second -% printing set this to 2 so that errors +% printing set this to 2 so that errors % already corrected in that printing will not % appear in your errata listing. % @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ % Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same % format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed % in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in -% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. % % % \showallerrors @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the -problem. +problem. \end{list} @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ problem. If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors \begin{quote}\ttfamily sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\ - goossens@cern.ch + goossens@cern.ch \end{quote} preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e., \begin{flushleft} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.pdf Binary files differindex 709ae697a3d..18ae7e66c78 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.pdf |